747917
213
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/228
Pagina verder
1M23Z07702
WEB FULL MANUAL
2
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction 6
Support and Service 6
Application, Export, and
Modication 6
Compliance Information Statement7
DenitionsofSymbols 7
SafetyPrecautions(donotoperate
without reading) 8
Features 12
ContentsandTechnical
Specications 12
TransmitterControls 13
Transmitter'sAntenna 15
TransmitterLipoBattery
LT2F2000B 16
HowtoturntransmitterpowerON/
OFF 18
TouchDisplay 19
HOME/EXITandU.MENU/MON19
LockDisplay 20
RFomode 20
Switch(SA-SH) 21
Volume 22
Slider 22
DigitalTrims(T1-T4) 23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MonitorLEDdisplay 24
StickControl 24
StickControl:AirplaneExample 25
StickControl:HelicopterExample
26
StickControl:MulticopterExample
27
StickAdjustment 28
StickMode 29
microSDcard 30
Connector/Plug 31
ReceiverNomenclature 32
Receiver'sAntennaInstallation 35
Safetyprecautionswhenyouinstall
receiver/servos 36
S.BUS/S.BUS2Installation 37
S.BUS2System 38
S.BUS2Sdevicesetting 39
HomeScreen 40
LinkProcedure 41
AfterSetting 42
ModelID 43
RangeTestingYourR/CSystem 44
Modelbasicsettingprocedure 45
3
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
ServoConnectionbyModelType 50
Airplane/Glider 50
Helicopter 54
Multicopter 54
SYSTEMMENU 55
Display 56
Soundvolume 57
Systemtimer 57
H/Wsetting 58
Battery 59
Rangecheck 59(→44)
S.Busservo 60
Information 63
LINKAGEMENU 64
Servomonitor 65
Modelselect 66
Modeltype 69
Servoreverse 71
Endpoint 72
Servospeed 73
Sub-trim 73
Function 74
Failsafe 76
Systemtype 77
Trimsetting 79
Throttlecut 80
Idledown 81
Swashring(Helionly) 82
Swash(Helionly,exceptH-1) 83
Stickalarm 85
Timer 86
Function name 88
Telemetrysystem 89
Sensor 91
Telemetry 94
Telemetry:Receiver[Battery] 95
Telemetry:Receiver[Ext-batt] 96
Telemetry:Temperature 97
Telemetry:RPMsensor 98
Telemetry:Altitude 99
Telemetry:Altitude[Variometer] 100
Telemetry:Voltage[Battery] 103
Telemetry:Voltage[Ext-batt] 104
Telemetry:GPS[Distance] 105
Telemetry:GPS[Speed] 107
Telemetry:GPS[Altitude,
Variometer,Position] 108
4
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry:Servosensor[Current]
109
Telemetry:Servosensor
[Temperature,Angle] 110
Telemetry:Currentsensor[Current]
111
Telemetry:Airspeedsensor
[Airspeed] 112
Tele.setting(Telemetrysetting) 113
Trainer 115
Warningsetting 118
Usermenusetting 119
Datareset 120
MODELMENU(Airplane/Glider)
121
Conditionselect 122
AFR 124
Dualrate 125
Prog,mixes(Programmixing) 126
Ailerondierential 128
Flapsetting 129
AIL→Camberap 130
AIL→Brakeap 131
Aileron→Rudder 132
Elevator→Camber 133
Cambermixing 134
Airbrake→ELE 136
Camberap→ELE 137
Rudder→Aileron 138
Rudder→Elevator 139
Buttery 140
Trimmix1/2 143
Snaproll(Airplaneonly) 144
Airbrake(Airplaneonly) 145
Gyro 146
Ailevator 148
Acceleration 149
Motor 150
V-tail 151
Winglet 152
MODELMENU(Helicopter) 153
Conditionselect 154
AFR 156
Dualrate 157
Prog,mixes(Programmixing) 158
Pitchcurve 160
Throttlecurve 163
Acceleration 165
5
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Throttlehold 166
Swashmixing 167
Throttlemixing 168
Pitch→Needle 169
Pitch→Rudder(Revolutionmixing)
170
Gyro(Helicopter) 171
Governor 173
GyrosettingCGY755CGY760R175
Wiredconnection:Advancedsetting
176
Wirelesstunings 177
HomeScreen 178
BasicMenu 180
S.BUSBasicMenu 181
SwashBasic 182
FlightTune(Aileron/ElevatorBasic
settings) 186
RudderBasic 189
GovenorBasic 190
ExpertMenu 193
RudderExpert 194
FlightTuneExpert(Aileron/Elevator
Expertsettings) 197
SwashDetail 198
GovenorExpert 201
MODELMENU(Multicopter) 203
Conditionselect 204
AFR 206
Dualrate 207
Prog,mixes(Programmixing) 208
Gyro 209
CommonOperationsusedin
functionsetupscreen 211
Operationsvaluesetting 211
Operationsrelatedtoight
conditions 211
OperationsrelatedtonetuningVR
212
Operationsrelatedtoservospeed
213
Curvesettingoperation 214
Switchselectionmethod 218
PCPort 222
RealFlightConnectionmethod 222
Updating 224
T14SG/FX-22/T12K
T16IZ
CONVERSION 226
6
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba
®
FASSTest-2.4 GHz
*
T16IZ series digital proportional R/C system. This system is
extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of your system
and to y safely, please read this manual carefully. If you have any diculties while using your system, please consult
the manual, our online Frequently Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the
Futaba Service Center.
*FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry
Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your hobby’s “o
season” to ensure safe operation.
InNorthAmerica
Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. Please be
sure to regularly visit the T16IZ Frequently Asked Questions web site at www.futabausa.com/. This page includes
extensive programming, use, set up and safety information on the T16IZ radio system and is updated regularly. Any
technical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this web page. If you do not nd the answers to your
questions there, please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and
convenient response.
Don’t have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge at most public libraries, schools, and other public
resources. We nd internet support to be a fabulous reference for many modelers as items can be printed and saved for
future reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to access
the internet for information, however, don’t worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central
time to assist you.
ForService:
FUTABA Corporation of America
2681 Wall Triana Hwy Huntsville, AL 35824, U.S.A.
Phone:1-256-461-9399 FAX:1-256-461-1059
https://www.futabausa.com/
E-mail: service@futabaUSA.com
OutsideNorthAmerica
Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems or service
needs. Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems
sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support center for
assistance.
INTRODUCTION
Application,Export,andModication
1. This product may be used for unmanned aerial vehicle use. It is not intended for use in any application other than
unmanned aerial vehicle control. The product is subject to regulations of the Ministry of Radio/Telecommunications
and is restricted under Japanese law to such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:
(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws governing
the country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is then re-exported to other
countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may
be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba
distributor in your country, please contact the seller immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.
(b) Use of this product with anything other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations,
and an application for export approval must be submitted. This equipment must not be utilized to operate equipment
other than radio controlled models.
3. Modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts: Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification,
adjustment, and replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the warranty.
Please visit www.futabausa.com to create and submit a service
ticket for warranty, repair, or check up work
7
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
ComplianceInformationStatement(forU.S.A.)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
(3)RF Radiation Exposure Statement (For T16IZ)
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.This transmitter
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement (For R7108SB)
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.
The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:
FUTABA Corporation of America
2681 Wall Triana Hwy Huntsville, AL 35824, U.S.A.
Phone:1-256-461-9399 FAX:1-256-461-1059
https://www.futabausa.com/
E-mail: service@futabaUSA.com
CAUTION:
To assure continued FCC compliance:
Any changes or modications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the users authority to
operate the equipment.
ComplianceInformationStatement(forCanada)
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
French:
Cet appareil radio est conforme au CNR d’Industrie Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux
deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à
accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement
du dispositif.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition au rayonnement du CI établies pour un environnement non
contrôlé. Cet émetteur ne doit pas être co-situé ou fonctionner conjointement avec une autre antenne ou émetteur.
DeclarationofConformity(forEU)
Hereby, Futaba Corporation declares that the radio equipment type is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
http://www.rc.futaba.co.jp/english/dl/declarations.html
8
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
FlyingSafety
WheretoFly
We recommend that you y at a recognized model airplane ying eld. You can nd model clubs and elds by
asking your nearest hobby dealer, or, in the US, by contacting the Academy of Model Aeronautics.
The national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) has more than 2,500 chartered clubs across the country.
Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are available. Contact the
AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below.
AcademyofModelAeronautics
5161 East Memorial Drive
Muncie, IN 47302
Tele. (800) 435-9262
Fax (765) 289-4248
or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org
Alwayspayparticular attentionto the ying eld’s rules, as well as the presence and
location of spectators, the wind direction, and any obstacles on the eld. Be very careful
ying in areas near power lines, tall buildings, or communication facilities as there may be
radio interference in their vicinity.
Precautions
Application, Export, and Modification Precautions.
1. This product is only designed for use with radio control models. Use of the product described in this instruction manual is limited to
radio control models.
2. Export precautions:
a) When this product is exported, it cannot be used where prohibited by the laws governing radio waves of the destination country.
b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations.
3. Modification, adjustment, and parts replacement:
Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification, adjustment, or replacement of parts on this product.
■ No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
■ The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
■ The contents of this manual should be complete, but if there are any unclear or missing parts please contact a Futaba Service
Center.
■ Futaba is not responsible for the use of this product by the customer.
■ Company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.
For safe use
Please observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this product at all times.
Meaning of Special Markings:
The parts of this manual indicated by the following marks require special attention from the standpoint of safety.
DANGER -Procedureswhichmayleadtodangerousconditionsandcausedeath/seriousinjuryifnotcarriedoutproperly.
WARNING -Procedureswhichmayleadtoadangerousconditionorcausedeathorseriousinjurytotheuserifnotcarriedoutproperly,
orprocedureswheretheprobabilityofsupercialinjuryorphysicaldamageishigh.
CAUTION -Procedureswherethepossibilityofseriousinjurytotheuserissmall,butthereisadangerofinjury,orphysicaldamage,if
notcarriedoutproperly.
=Prohibited
=Mandatory
WARNING:Alwayskeepelectricalcomponentsawayfromsmallchildren.
9
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Flying Precautions
WARNING
Never grasp the transmitter antenna while ying.
■ The transmitter output may drop drastically.
Always make sure that all transmitter stick move-
ments operate all servos properly in the model prior to
flight. Also, make sure that all switches, etc. function
properly as well. If there are any di󰮐culties, do not use
the system until all inputs are functioning properly. 
Never y in range check mode. 
■ In the dedicated range test range check mode, the transmitter
output range is reduced and may cause a crash.
While operating, never touch the transmitter with, or
bring the transmitter near, another transmitter, a cell-
phone, or other wireless devices.
■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.
Do not point the antenna directly toward the aircraft
during ight. 
■ The antenna is directional and the transmitter output is
weakest. (The strength of the radio waves is greatest from the
sides of the antenna.)
Never y on a rainy day, when the wind is strong, or
at night. 
■ Water could lead to failure or improper functionality and poor
control of the aircraft which could lead to a crash.
Never turn the power switch o󰮏 during ight or while
the engine or motor is running. 
■ Operation will become impossible and the aircraft will crash.
Even if the power switch is turned on, operation will not begin
until transmitter and receiver internal processing is complete.
Do not start the engine or motor while wearing the
neck strap.  
■ The neck strap may become entangled with the rotating
propeller, rotor, etc. and cause a serious injury.
Do not fly when you are physically impaired as it
could pose a safety hazard to yourself or others.
Do not y at the following places:   
■ Near another radio control ying eld.
■ Near or above people.
■ Near homes, schools, hospitals or other places where people
congregate.
■ Near high voltage lines, high structures, or communication
facilities.
When setting the transmitter on the ground during
ight preparations, do not stand it upright.
■ The transmitter may tip over, the sticks may move and the
propeller or rotor may rotate unexpectedly and cause injury.
Do not touch the engine, motor, or ESC during and
immediately after use. 
■ These items may become hot during use.
For safety, y so that the aircraft is visible at all times.
   
■ Flying behind buildings or other large structures will not only
cause you to lose sight of the aircraft, but also degrade the RF
link performance and cause loss of control.
From the standpoint of safety, always set the fail safe
function.   
■ In particular, normally set the throttle channel to idle. For a
helicopter, set the throttle channel to maintain a hover.
When flying, always return the transmitter setup
screen to the Home screen.
■ Erroneous input during ight is extremely dangerous.
Always check the remaining capacity of the trans-
mitter and receiver batteries before each ying session
prior to ight. 
■ Low battery capacity will cause loss of control and a crash.
Always check operation of each control surface and
perform a range test before each flying session. Also,
when using the trainer function, check the operation of
both the teacher and student transmitter. 
■ Even one incorrect transmitter setting or aircraft abnormality
can cause a crash.
Before turning on the transmitter:
1. Always move the transmitter throttle stick position to the
minimum (idle) position. 
2. Turn on the transmitter rst and then the receiver.
When turning off the transmitter’ s power switch
after the engine or motor has stopped (state in which it
will not rotate again):
1. Turn o󰮏 the receiver power switch. 
2. Then turn o󰮏 the transmitter power switch.
■ If the power switch is turned on/off in the opposite order, the
propeller may rotate unexpectedly and cause a serious injury.
■ Also always observe the above order when setting the fail safe
function.
When adjusting the transmitter, stop the engine ex-
cept when necessary. In the case of a motor, disconnect
the wiring that allows it to continue operation. When
doing so, please exercise extreme caution. Ensure that
the aircraft is secured and that it will not come into con-
tact with anything or anyone. Ensure that the motor will
not rotate prior to making any adjustments.
■ Unexpected high speed rotation of the engine/motor may
cause a serious injury.
10
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Do not recharge a battery that is damaged, deterio-
rated, leaking electrolyte, or wet. 
Do not allow the charger or battery to become wet.
■ Do not use the charger when it or your hands are wet. Do not
use the charger in humid places.    
Do not short circuit the battery.  
Do not solder, repair, deform, modify, or disassemble
the battery and/or battery charger.  
Do not drop the battery into a re or bring it near a re.
   
Do not charge and store the battery in direct sunlight
or other hot places.   
Do not charge the battery if it is covered with any ob-
ject as it may become very hot.
Do not use the battery in a combustible environment. 
■ The combustibles may could ignite ignite and cause an
explosion or re.
Always charge the battery before each ying session.
 ■ If the battery goes dead during ight, the aircraft will crash.
Insert the power cord plug rmly into the recep-
tacle up to its base.
Battery and Charger Handling Precautions
DANGER
Always use the charger with the specified power
supply voltage.
If the battery liquid should get in your eyes, do not
rub your eyes, but immediately wash them with tap wa-
ter or other clean water and get treated by a doctor.
■ The liquid can cause blindness.  
Do not touch the charger and battery for any length
of time during charging. 
■ Doing so may result in burns.    
Do not use a charger or battery that has been dam-
aged.  
If any abnormalities such as smoke or discoloration
are noted with either the charger or the battery, remove
the battery from the transmitter or charger and discon-
nect the power cord plug and do not use the charger. 
■ Continued use may cause re, combustion, generation of heat,
or rupture.
Do not subject the batteries to impact.
■ Doing so may cause re, combustion, generation of heat,
rupture, or liquid leakage.
Use and store the battery and battery charger in a se-
cure location away from children. 
■ Not doing so may cause electric shock or injury.
WARNING
If the battery leaks liquid or generates an abnormal
odor, immediately move it to a safe place for disposal.
■ Not doing so may cause combustion.
If the battery liquid gets on your skin or clothing, im-
mediately ush the area with tap water or other clean
water.
■ Consult a doctor. The liquid can cause skin damage.
After charging, disconnect the charger from the re-
ceptacle. 
When recycling or disposing of the battery, isolate
the terminals by covering them with tape.
■ Short circuit of the terminals may cause combustion,
generation of heat or rupture.
Do not y with the USB AC adapter for charging con-
nected.
Do not use the battery with devices other than the
corresponding transmitter.
Do not place heavy objects on top of the battery or
charger. Also, do not place the battery or charger in any
location where it may fall.   
■ Doing so may cause damage or injury.
Do not store or use the battery where it is dusty or
humid. 
CAUTION
■ Insert the power cord plug into the receptacle only after
eliminating the dust.
After the transmitter has been used for a long time,
the battery may become hot. Do not touch the battery
immediately.
■ Not doing so may cause a burn.
Do not bend or pull the cord unreasonably and do
not place heavy objects on the cord.
■ The power cord may be damaged and cause combustion,
generation of heat, or electric shock.
1. Replacement of a battery with an incorrect type that can defeat a
safeguard.
2. Disposal of a battery into fire or a hot oven, or mechanically
crushing or cutting of a battery, that can result in an explosion.
3. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding
environment that can result in an explosion or the leakage of
ammable liquid or gas.
4. A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure that may result
in an explosion or the leakage of ammable liquid or gas.
Temperature
Low temp. protection -10 ± 5 ° C
High temp. protection 60 ± 5 ° C
Temperature protection for battery charge:
11
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Never disassemble or modify the microSD card. 
Do not bend, drop, scratch or place heavy objects on
the microSD card.
If smoke or an abnormal odor emanates from the card,
immediately turn o󰮏 the transmitter power.
Since the microSD card is an electronic device, be
careful of static electricity. 
■ Static electricity may cause erroneous operation or other
trouble.
Do not use the microSD card near radio and televi-
sion sets, audio equipment, motors and other equip-
ment that generates noise. 
■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.
Do not store the microSD card in the following places:
Where the humidity is high
Where the temperature di󰮏erence is severe
Where it is very dusty
Where the card will be exposed to shock and vibration
Near speakers and other magnetic devices
micro SD Card (Commercial Product) Handling Precautions
WARNING
CAUTION
*Read the instruction manual supplied with the microSD card for details.
Recorded data
The data recorded on the microSD card
cannot be compensated regardless of the
contents or cause of the trouble or obstruction.
Futaba does not perform data restoration or
recovery work.
Do not use the microSD card where it may be ex-
posed to water, chemicals, oil, or other uids. 
■ Doing so may cause a re or electric shock by short circuiting.
Do not insert foreign matter into the transmitter card slot.
■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.
Do not expose the card to shock and vibration and do
not remove the card from the card slot while data is be-
ing written or read. 
■ The data may be damaged or lost.
Keep wireless equipment, batteries, aircraft, etc.
away from children. 
Do not directly expose plastic parts to fuel, oil, ex-
haust gas, etc. 
■ If left in such an environment, the plastic may be damaged.
■ Since the metal parts of the case may corrode, always keep
them clean.
Join the Academy of Model Aeronautics. 
■ The Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) provides guidelines
and liability protection should the need arise.
Storage and Disposal Precautions
Other Precautions
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not store wireless devices in the following places:
 
Where it is extremely hot (40℃ [104 ] or higher) or
cold (-10℃ [14 ] or lower)
Where the equipment will be exposed to direct sun-
light
Where the humidity is high
Where vibration is prevalent
Where it is very dusty
Where the device may be exposed to steam and heat
CAUTION
When the device will not be used for a long time, re-
move the batteries from the transmitter and aircraft and
store them in a dry place where the temperature is be-
tween 0℃ and 25℃ [32 and 77 ].
■ Leaving batteries inside your model and radio when they are not
being used for long periods will result in battery deterioration,
liquid leakage and other damage.
Always use genuine Futaba products such as trans-
mitter, receiver, servo, ESC, etc.
■ Futaba is not responsible for damage sustained by combination
with parts other than Futaba Genuine Parts. Use the parts
specied in the instruction manual and catalog.
12
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Features
FASSTestsystem
The T16IZ transmitter has adopted the bidirectional communication system "FASSTest". Data from the receiver can be checked in
your transmitter. FASSTest is a maximum 18 channels 2.4 GHz dedicated system.
ColortouchscreenLCD
T16IZ has an HVGA 4.3 inch, full-color, backlit LCD touch screen. The screen is transflective which enables both indoor and
outdoor visibility.
S.BUS2system
By using the S.BUS2 system multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with a minimum amount of cables.
Modeltypes
Multicopter. 8 swash types are available for helicopters. 7 wing types and 3 tail types are available for airplanes and gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in advance at the factory.
Lithium-ionpolymerbattery
T16IZ is operated by a 7.4 V/2,000 mAh Lithium-ion polymer battery.
microSDcard(SecureDigitalmemorycard)(Notincluded)
Model data can be saved to a microSD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When T16IZ transmitter software files are
released, the software can be updated by using a microSD card update.
Editbutton
Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately “Returned” to the HOME screen during operation.
Setting operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a touch sensor.
Vibrationfunction
Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms by vibrating the transmitter in addition to sounding a buzzer.
Speech function
A function is equipped which allows the system to provide telemetry data audibly. This function can also be utilized with
commercially available earphones.
Contents and Technical Specications
(Specications and ratings are subject to change without notice.)
•T16IZTransmitter
•R7108SBReceiver
•LT2F2000BLiPoBattery
Transmitter T16IZ
(2-stick,18-channel,FASSTest-2.4GHzsystem)
Transmittingfrequency:2.4GHzband
System:FASSTest18CH/FASSTest12CH/S-FHSS/T-FHSS/
FASSTMULT(Europeisnotsupported)/FASST7CH(Europeisnotsupported)switchable
Powersupply:7.4
VLT2F2000BLiPobattery
Frequencyband:2.4GHz
RFpoweroutput:100mWEIRP
Receiver R7108SB
(FASSTest-2.4GHzsystem,DualAntennaDiversity,S.BUS/S.BUS2system)
Powerrequirement:3.7V-7.4VbatteryorregulatedoutputfromESC,etc.(*1)
Size:0.98x1.86x0.56in.(24.9x47.3x14.3mm)
Weight:0.42oz.(12.0g)
Frequencyband:2.4GHz
RFpoweroutput:25mWEIRP
(*1) When using ESCs make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.
Note:Thissetdoesnotincludeacharger.UseacommerciallyavailableUSBchargerAC
adapter(USB-Atype5V-2A)ortheFutabaoptionalUSBACadapter.
Note:ThebatteryintheT16IZtransmitterdoes notarrivealreadyattachedtothebattery
connector.Pleaseconnectthebatteryconnectorbeforeuse.
•USBCable
•HexKey
•TxStrap
• Short Manual
*The contents may vary on the type of set.
13
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Transmitter Controls
Stick Stick
Power Switch
Hook
U.MENU/MON. Button
(User menu/Servo monitor)
HOME/EXIT Button
Color LCD Touch Display
Digital trim
T1-T4
Antenna
SD card Slot
PC Port
Monitor LED
Left Dial (LD)
Right Dial (RD)
Switch
SC.SD.SG.SH
Switch
SA.SB.SE.SF
J2J3
J1J4
Top
Front
The transmitter
can be used as a
game controller by
connecting it to a
computer with a USB
cable. (Some games
cannot be used.)
14
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Left Slider
LS
Right Slider
RS
Battery cover
Trainer port
S.I/F Port
 (S.BUS setting)
Kickstand
Charging Port
Charging LED
Earpone
Jack
Stick tension adjustment port
Back
Bottom
The LCD displays shown in this manual may vary from your own,
depending upon your model type. LCD displays may also vary as a
result of version upgrades or other changes.
The angle when the transmitter is
placed can be changed by rotating
the swing handle and tightening
the screw.
15
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Transmitter's Antenna
As with all radio frequency transmissions, the strongest area of signal transmission is from the sides of
the transmitter's antenna. As such, the antenna should not be pointed directly at the model. If your ying
style creates this situation, easily move the antenna to correct this situation.
Rotating antenna
The antenna can be rotated 90 degrees and angles 90 degrees.
Forcing the antenna further than this can damage it. The
antenna is not removable.
CAUTION
Do not grasp the transmitter antenna
during ight.
■Doing so may degrade the quality of the RF
transmission to the model.
Do not carry the transmitter by the
antenna.
■The antenna wire may break, making operation
impossible.
Do not pull the antenna forcefully.
■The antenna wire may break, making operation
impossible.
1
2
3 4 5
Low power
High power High power
If you y with your
transmitter facing
the model at the
angle shown in the
illustration, bend the
antenna 90 degrees.
Do not y your model
with the antenna's
tip pointing in its
direction.
Stand up:1 5
Storage: 5 ⇒ 1
*Rotate rst *Stand up next
16
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Transmitter LiPo Battery LT2F2000B
Installing/removing the LT2F2000B
Install the battery into the transmitter
Close the battery cover completely
Be careful not to pinch
the wiring
Connect the battery
connector
Press the tab to
open the battery
cover.
First insert two tabs
Remove the
battery cover
Tab
Battery cover
This connector connects to
the transmitter.
LT2F2000B
LiPo Battery
Press the tab to
close the battery
cover.
Click ! Click !
CAUTION
Be sure to lock the battery cover.
* If the battery cover comes o during ight, the battery
will fall o and crash.
17
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
WARNING
Be careful not to drop the battery.
Never disconnect the battery connector
from the T16IZ transmitter after
turning o󰮏 the power until the screen is
completely blank and the transmitter has
shut down completely.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.
* If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error" will
be shown the next time when you turn on the power of the
transmitter. Do not use the transmitter as it is. Send it to the
Futaba service center.
WARNING
Do not plug and unplug the charger
when your hands are wet.
*It may cause an electric shock.
Do not overcharge/overdischarge the
battery.
*Overcharging/Overdischarging a battery can result in
burns, re, injuries, or loss of sight due to overheating,
breakage, or electrolyte leakage.
CAUTION
When the charger is not in use,
disconnect it from the AC outlet.
* Do this to prevent accidents and to avoid overheating.
Charging a battery
Charging LED
Red: Charging
Green: Full
Use a commercially available
USB charger AC adapter
USB-A type 5 V-2 A
USB Cable
This set is not equipped with an AC adapter
for charging. Must be purchased separately.
AC adapter USB-A type 5 V - 2 A
or
Futaba option AC adapter USB type
Access the charge port by
ipping the rubber cover
on the bottom of the
transmitter.
18
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Power OFFPower ON
Throttle Stick Low
Power Switch Power Switch
Long Push
Push
1. Turn on the transmitter power switch.
2. Turn on the receiver or speed control power switch.
Always be sure the motor/engine is stopped.
1. Turn off the receiver or speed control power switch.
2. Then turn off the transmitter power switch.
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Turning on the power switches
If the power switches are turned off in the opposite order the model may unexpectedly run out of control and
cause a very dangerous situation.
Turning o the power switches
How to turn transmitter power ON/OFF
When turning on the power, the T16IZ transmitter will begin emitting RF automatically after it conrms
the surrounding RF conditions. The status of the transmitter is displayed by LED at the upper part of the
front of a T16IZ.
*If THR stick is high, a WARNING screen will appear. Another warning will appear if a power
supply is attached. (In Multicopter mode, the THR position alarm will not appear.)
If the "Thr position" alarm displays
*If the throttle stick is in the high position when the
power is turned ON
Warning alarm
Tap this to stop the alarm
and RF signal. Only panel
screen operation is active, the
transmitter will not link to any
receiver.
When the alarm activates, lower the throttle stick
before turning the receiver power ON.
*If the power is turned ON when the idle-up, air brake,
etc., switches are ON, the above warning will display.
Ensure the relevant switches are turned OFF.
19
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Touch Display
HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON.
Tap the panel with your nger to navigate.
*Plastic lm is attached to the Touch Display. Please
be careful so that you don't scratch the Touch
Display with anything hard such as a metal object.
Don't push the Touch Display with excessive force
or drop anything on the panel.
*Although you may nd some air bubbles under the
plastic panel due to environmental changes such
as temperature, it is not a defect and will cause no
problems.
*Color LCD is made from many pixels. Some
pixels hold lighting. Moreover, some pixels go out.
And a screen may flicker. Such condition is the
characteristics of color LCD. It is not failure.
Tapping the settings buttons for
each value on the settings screen
will cause value input buttons to
appear at the top of the panel.
Value input buttons display at the
top of the display.
Pressing and holding a value will
return it to its default setting.
Small change
in value
Large change
in value
Large change
in value
HOME/EXIT
Press
Return to the
previous screen
Press and hold
Return to the
home screen
Press from
HOME screen.
To Telemetry
display
Press and hold
from HOME
screen.
Panel lock / Lock
release
Press
To user menu
display
Press and
hold
To servo monitor
display
U.MENU/MON.
20
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Lock Display
Temporarily activating this function makes it impossible to change data by accidental input during
ight.
RF o mode
Model operation is disabled, but display operation without RF signal output is allowed. (Reduces
battery power consumption during set-up.)
Display unlock
HOME/EXIT Press and hold
HOME/EXIT Press and hold
Restart the power
to transmit RF
signals.
"RF o󰮏" Model
operation is not
possible, but only
panel operation is.
U.MENU/MON.
Press and
Power ON
Lock Display
Howtolock
Howtounlock
1. With the home screen displayed.
2. Press the HOME/EXIT button for about 1
second. "Key Icon" is displayed and the
keys will be disabled.
1. Press the Home/Exit button for about 1
second, and the display will then become
unlocked.
CAUTION
The T16IZ's touch screen is very sensitive. To
avoid accidentally activating it during a flight, it
is suggested that it be locked. Due to the touch
screen's sensitivity, allowing it to be touched
during flight by a neck strap hook, servo extension,
or even your hand could be dangerous. Please use
the Touch Display lock for added safety during
flight.
21
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SA : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
SD : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
SB : 3 positions; Alternate;
Long lever
SC : 3 positions; Alternate;
Long lever
SF : 2 positions; Alternate;
Long lever
Alternate2 positions Momentary3 positions
SH : 2 positions; Momentary;
Long lever
SG : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
SE : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
Switch (SA-SH)
*Self retum
22
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
LS RS
Slider
LS (Left), RS (Right):
The Linear Slider LS and RS oer analog input.
*The T16IZ transmitter beeps when the lever comes to the center.
*You can select a slide lever and set the movement direction on the setting screen of mixing functions.
The volume LD and RD knobs allow
analog input.
*The T16IZ transmitter beeps when the volume
knob reaches the center position.
*You can use each setting screen of the mixing
functions to select volumes and define the
direction of movement.
Volume
LD RD
23
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Digital Trims T1-T4
Digital trim operational example
T1T4
T3 T2
Elevator Neutral
Elevator Down
◆When the airplane goes up while the
elevator stick is neutral.
◆When the airplane dives while the
elevator stick is neutral.
◆Adjust so that the airplane flies level.
Elevator Neutral
Elevator Up
◆Elevator trim down
◆Elevator trim up
This transmitter is equipped with 4 digital trims.
Each time you press a trim button, the trim position
moves one step. If you continue pressing it, the trim
position starts to move faster. In addition, when
the trim position returns to the center, the tone will
change. You can always monitor trim positions by
referencing the LCD screen.
*You can select the trim step amount and the display unit
on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within the
linkage menu.
Note: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the
non-volatile memory and will remain there.
*Example Stick Mode2
Long push the trim as it
is to reset it to neutral.
24
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Monitor LED Display
The status of the transmitter is displayed by LED indicators on the upper porton of the T16IZ.
Stick Control
Yaw axis
Pitch axis
Elevator Stick
Aileron stick
Throttle stick
Engine/motor
Power
Rudder stick
Roll axis
*Example Stick Mode2
Red LED
ON At startup
◆ Blinking
Power switch is turned on with
the throttle stick on the high
side.
Power switch is turned on when
any condition switch is activated
(in the ON state).
Blue LED
ON Radio waves are being transmitted.
OFF Radio waves are in the OFF state.
◆ Blinking (0.5 s) Link mode
Blinking (1 s) Range check mode
25
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Stick control : Airplane Example
A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)
Right roll
Left roll
Straight
A rudder is
right.
A rudder is
left.
The left aileron
is down.
The left aileron
is up.
Level flight
Level flight
The right aileron
is up.
The right
aileron is
down.
Elevator is
up.
Elevator is
down.
Aileron stick
To the right
Neutral
Neutral
Nose Up
Nose Down
Middle
High throttle
Low throttle
Roll Axis Control
Yaw Axis Control Throttle Control
Elevator stick
UP
(moved to the bottom)
Elevator stick
DOWN
(moved to the top)
Aileron stick
To the left
Pitch Axis Control
Rudder stick
To the right
Neutral
Rudder stick
To the left
Nose Right
Nose Left
Throttle stick
MIDDLE
(neutral)
Throttle stick
HIGHT
(moved to the top)
Throttle stick
SLOW
(moved to the bottom)
*Example Stick Mode2
26
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Stick control : Helicopter Example
A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)
Right roll
Left roll
Straight
Hovering
Rise
Descent
Level flight
Level flight
Aileron stick
To the right
Neutral
Neutral
Nose Up
Nose Down
Middle
HighPitch Up
Pitch Down
Slow
Roll Axis Control
Yaw Axis Control Throttle /Pitch Control
Elevator stick
UP
(moved to the bottom)
Elevator stick
DOWN
(moved to the top)
Aileron stick
To the left
Pitch Axis Control
Rudder stick
To the right
Neutral
Rudder stick
To the left
Nose Right
Nose Left
Throttle stick
MIDDLE
(neutral)
Throttle stick
HIGHT
(moved to the top)
Throttle stick
SLOW
(moved to the bottom)
*Example Stick Mode2
27
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Stick control : Multicopter Example
A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)
Stop
Right roll
Right slide
Back slide
Front slide
Left slide
Left roll
Hovering
Rise
Descent
Hovering
Level flight
Hovering
Level flight
Hovering
Level flight
Aileron stick
To the right
Neutral
Neutral
Nose Up
Nose Down
Roll Axis Control
Yaw Axis Control
Throttle Control
Elevator stick
UP
(moved to the bottom)
Elevator stick
DOWN
(moved to the top)
Aileron stick
To the left
Pitch Axis Control
Rudder stick
To the right
Neutral
Rudder stick
To the left
Nose Right
Nose Left
Throttle stick
MIDDLE
(neutral)
Throttle stick
HIGH
(moved to the top)
Throttle stick
SLOW
(moved to the bottom)
*Example Stick Mode2
28
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Stick Adjustment
Lever head Lever head
A B
Adjustment of the stick lever length
You can adjust the length of stick levers as you
like. It is recommended to adjust the length of the
sticks in line with your hand size.
1. Hold the lever head "B" and turn the lever
head "A" counter-clockwise. The lock will be
released.
2. Turn the lever-head "A" clockwise as you hold
the lever-head "B" after placing it as you like.
Adjustment of stick lever tension
The tension of the self-return type stick lever can
be adjusted.
Turn screw clockwise.
Stick tension maximum
Stick tension minimum
Turn screw counter-clockwise.
1. Use a screw driver to adjust the spring
strength as you prefer by turning the
adjusting screw of the stick you want to
adjust.
*Turning the screw clockwise increases the tension.
CAUTION: Loosening the screw too much
can interfere with the internal stick operation.
Back side
Spring Hard
Spring Hard
Spring Hard
Spring Hard
Spring Soft
Spring Soft
Spring Soft
Spring Soft
J2 stick
J1 stick
J3 stick
J4 stick
You can adjust how quickly the
stick returns to neutral.
29
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Stick Mode
●The changed stick mode will be
reflected from the newly created
model data.
Change stick mode before entering
model data.
WARNING
Before the flight, make sure that the
operation of the stick matches the
model operation.
System menu H/W setting
Select stick mode
Calibrate after
changing stick mode
Back side
Default
AIL
THR
RUD
ELE
MODE1
AIL
ELE
RUD
THR
MODE2
AIL
THR
RUD
ELE
MODE3
AIL
ELE
RUD
THR
MODE4
J2J3
Ratchet +
Spring Free
Ratchet Free
Spring ACT
J2 stick
J2 stick
Spring Hard Spring Hard
Spring Soft Spring Soft
J2 stick J3 stick
Spring Free
Spring ACT
J3 stick
Ratchet +
Ratchet Free
J3 stick
EX: MODE2 MODE1
30
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 ) Rotate the antenna. 2 ) Open the rubber cover and insert the
microSD card into the SD card slot.
Card slot
SD card slot
*Pay attention to the proper
orientation of the SD card, as
shown here.
3 ) When the microSD card is pressed in once
again, the card will be released from the
card slot and can be removed.
microSD card (secure digital memory card) (not included)
The T16IZ transmitter model data can be stored by using any commonly
found microSD card. When T16IZ update software is released, the software is
updated using a microSD card. The T16IZ is capable of using SD and SDHC
cards (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB).
microSD card reader/writer
Saving model data and update les (released from
Futaba) into the microSD card, you can use those
files on your T16IZ transmitter. Equipment for
reading and writing microSD cards is available at
most electronics stores.
Stored data
When you have a problem of saving or reading
data after a long period of use, please get a new
microSD card.
*We are not responsible for, and oer no compensation for,
memory card data that fails or is damaged for any reason.
Be sure to keep a backup of all important data stored in your
microSD card.
Inserting/removing the microSD card
The SD card slot is shown in the next gure.
31
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Open the rubber cover
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the power to
the transmitter before inserting or
removing the microSD card.
As the microSD card is a precision
device, do not use excessive force when
inserting.
-When a microSD card is installed in the
T16IZ transmitter, a folder called "Fu-
taba" is created. Folders called "LOG" and
"MODEL" are created in this folder. The
"MODEL" folder stores the model data and
the "LOG" folder stores the telemetry log
data.
-The telemetry log data recorded on the
microSD card can be converted to CSV
format by the telemeter log converter re-
leased on our home page. When copying or
moving a log le, always select both .FLI
and .FLD le.
Connector for trainer function
When you use the trainer function, connect the
optional trainer cable between the transmitters for
teacher and student.
*You can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen in the System menu.
Connector/Plug
Trainer
Connector
S.BUS (S.I/F)
Connector
Earphone
Plug
S.BUS connector (S.I/F)
When using an S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor,
connect them both here.
Earphone plug
Connecting a stereo headphone to this plug, the
speech information of telemetry can be heard.
32
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Link/Mode Switch
Use the small plastic screw driver that was included
with your receiver.
The Link/Mode Switch is also used for the CH
mode selection.
(The button is not used to link the transmitter and
receiver together. )
Extra Voltage Connector
Use this connector when using a voltage telemetry
device to send the battery voltage information (DC
0 ~ 70 V) from the receiver to the transmitter.
Please use the External voltage input cable.
(UBB0141) This connects directly to your main
motor batteries.
DANGER
Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.
Do not short-circuit the battery
terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause
abnormal heating, re and burns.
Please double check your polarity (+ and
-) when hooking up your connectors.
* If + and - of wiring are mistaken, it will damage, ignite and
explode.
Don’ t connect to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.
Before using the receiver, be sure to read the
precautions listed in the following pages.
Connector
"1 through 6":outputs for the channels 1 through 6
"7/B": outputs of 7 channels and power.
"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.
[S.BUSSevoS.BUSGyro]
"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.
[TelemetrySensor]
*When using nine or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R7108SB and link both
to your transmitter.
Connector insertion
Firmly insert the connector in the direction shown
in the gure. Insert the S.BUS2 by turning it 90
degrees.
WARNING
S.BUS2connectors
Don't connect an S.BUS servo/gyro to
S.BUS2 connector.
LED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of the
receiver.
Receiver Nomenclature
Link/Mode
Channels 1 ~ 6
Channel 7 / Battery
Channel 8 or S.BUS
S.BUS2 : Telemetry sensor
or S.BUS2 equipment
33
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Connection of a receiver battery
Connection example
Battery
3.7 7.4 V
Switch
Servo
Y-harness
When all ports are used.
Battery
3.7 7.4 V
Switch
A battery is connectable
also with which port.
R7108SB
Channel 1-8
Conventional servos
Battery
PWM
Battery
HUB
HUB
S.BUS servos
Channel 1 -18
Switch
Switch
to 8/SB port
S.BUS
R7108SB
CH Mode
→Mode A
WARNING
Please make sure that you use a battery
that can deliver enough capacity for the
number and kind of servos used. Dry
batteries cannot be used.
Power supply
Please make sure that you use a battery that can deliver enough capacity for
the number and kind of servos used. Alkaline batteries cannot be used.
WARNING
Receiver
Do not insert either a switch
or battery in this manner.
DANGER
34
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Output
connector
Channel
Mode A
1
8CH
Mode B
1
7CH
Mode C
9
16CH
Mode D
9
15CH
1 1 1 9 9
2 2 2 10 10
3 3 3 11 11
4 4 4 12 12
5 5 5 13 13
6 6 6 14 14
7/B 7 7 15 15
8/SB 8 S.BUS 16 S.BUS
Red LED
blink
1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times
R7108SB CH Mode table
Default
Channel Modes
The R7108SB is capable of changing its channel allocations as
described in the table below. This is especially important when
using the receiver in a dual receiver mode.
1
Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter is always OFF]
2
Press and hold the Link/Mode button for 5 seconds to 10
seconds.
3
When the LED of the receiver changes from blinking red
to blinking red with green, Link/Mode button is released.
4
The LED should now blink red two times in the patterns
described in the chart below.
5
Each press of the Link/Mode button advances the
receiver to the next mode.
6
When you reach the mode that you wish to operate in,
press and hold the Link/Mode button for more than 2
seconds.
When LED blinks in green with red, it is the
completion of a mode change, Link/Mode button is
released.
7
Please cycle the receiver power off and back on again
after changing the Channel mode.
LED Indication
System Status LED
FASSTest
No signal reception Red Solid
Receiving signals Green Solid
Waiting for link
Start → 2second
later → Red
Blink(1second)
FASST
No signal reception Red Solid
Receiving signals Green Solid
Receiving signals
but ID is unmatched
Green Blink
Waiting for link Red Blink
FASSTest
FASST
Unrecoverable error
(EEPROM, etc.)
Alternate blink
Green LED
blink
System
1 time FASSTest
2 times FASST Multi-ch Normal mode
3 times FASST Multi-ch High-speed mode
4 times FASST 7ch Normal mode
5 times FASST 7ch High-speed mode
R7108SB System table
*
FASST mode cannot use telemetry functions.
Systems(FASSTest FASST)changemethod
1
Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter is always OFF]
2
Press and hold the Link/Mode button for 10 seconds to 15 seconds.
3
When the LED begins to blink green the button may be released.
4
The LED should now be blinking green in one of the patterns
described by the chart below.
( Default : FASSTest )
5
Each press of the Link/Mode button advances the receiver to the
next system.
6
When you reach the system that you wish to operate in, press and
hold the Link/Mode button for more than 2 seconds.
When the LED
blinks green and red, the system change is complete. Release the
Link/Mode button.
7
Please cycle the receiver power off and back on again after
changing the system.
Default
35
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Receiver's Antenna Installation
The R7108SB has two antennas. In order to maximize signal reception and promote safe modeling Futaba
has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on both antennas and
y problem-free.
To obtain the best results of the diversity function,
please refer to the following instructions:
1. The two antennas must be kept as straight as
possible. Otherwise it will reduce the effective
range.
2. The two antennas should be placed at 90
degrees to each other.
This is not a critical figure, but the most
important thing is to keep the antennas
away from each other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal objects
that can attenuate the RF signal. In this case
the antennas should be placed at both
sides of the model. Then the best RF signal
condition is obtained at any ying attitude.
3. The antennas must be kept away from
conductive materials, such as metal, carbon
and fuel tank by at least a half inch. The
coaxial part of the antennas does not need
to follow these guidelines, but do not bend it
in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.
Antenna
*Must be kept as straight as possible.
Coaxial cable
R7108SB Receiver
Sleeve
Antenna
installation
90°
Do not bend the antenna part
Gently bend the coaxial
cable part.
Fix the sleeve to the model
Antenna part
Sleeve
Coaxial cable
36
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Servo lead wires
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
broken by vibration during flight, provide a
little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.
Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet so
that the lead wire is neat
and secure.
Margin in the lead wire.
Mounting the power switch
*Switch is not included in this set.
When mounting a power switch to an airframe,
make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than
the total stroke of the switch so that you can turn
the switch ON/OFF without binding.
Avoid mounting the switch where it can be
covered by engine oil and dust. In general, it is
recommended to mount the power switch on the
side of the fuselage that is opposite the muer.
Safety precautions when you
install receiver and servos.
WARNING
Connecting connectors
Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from vibration and
water
Wrap the receiver with something
soft such as foam rubber to avoid
vibration. If there is a chance of
getting wet, put the receiver in a
waterproof bag or balloon.
Receiver's antenna
Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do
not bind the receiver's antenna with
the cables for servos.
Locate the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables,
etc.
*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will reduce the
radio reception sensitivity and range, and may cause a
crash.
Servo throw
Adjust your system so that pushrods
will not bind or sag when operating
the servos to the full extent.
*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, the
servo could be damaged due to force on the gear train
and/or power consumption causing rapid battery drain.
Mounting servos
Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount.
And be sure that the servo cases do
not touch directly to the metal parts
such as servo mount.
*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly, vibration
will travel to and possibly damage the servo.
Mounting the Servo
*Servo is not included in this set.
Switch
Less than 5 mm of
mounting plate
Attached screw
Switch cover
37
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation
This set uses the S.BUS/S.BUS2 system. The wiring is as simplified and clean mounting as possible,
even with models that use a large number of servos. In addition, the wings can be quickly installed to the
fuselage without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire, even when there are a large
number of servos used.
●When using S.BUS/S.BUS2, special settings and mixes in your transmitter may be unnecessary.
●The S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos memorize the number of channels themselves. (settable with the T16IZ)
●The S.BUS/S.BUS2 system and conventional system (receiver conventional CH used) can be mixed.
Receiver: R7108SB
Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )
Switch: HSW-L
Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )
Elevator servo: BLS173SV×2 ( Optional )
Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )
HUB×3 ( Optional )
Receiver: R7108SB
Servo: S3174SV×9 ( Optional )
HUB×4 ( Optional )
S.BUS Glider usage example
S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example
38
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.BUS2 System
When using the S.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.
Receiver port
S.BUS Servo
S.BUS Gyro
S.BUS2
Servo
S.BUS2
Gyro
Telemetry sensor
S.BUS ×
S.BUS2
× (※)
S.BUS2 TABLE
(※)Don'tconnectS.BUSServo,S.BUS
GyrotoS.BUS2connector.
S.BUS2
Port
S.BUS
Port
(8/SB)
Hub
Hub Hub Hub
Servo
S.BUS2 ServoS.BUS Servo
S.BUS2 servo
Connection is possible
Mixed connection
of S.BUS and S.BUS2
is possible.
S.BUS2 gyro
Connection is possible
S.BUS servo
Connection is impossible
Telemetry sensor
Connection is impossible
S.BUS2
GYRO
CH Mode is set
to ModeB [D].
Telemetry
Sensors
S.BUSservosandgyrosandS.BUS2servosandgyrosmustbeusedinthecorrectreceiver
ports.Pleaserefertotheinstructionmanualtomakesureyouconnecttothecorrectone.
39
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.BUS/S.BUS2 device setting
S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T16IZ. Channel setting and
other data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.
(S.BUS/S.BUS2 servo)
S.BUS/S.BUS2
device
S.BUS/S.BUS2
device
(Telemetry sensor)
1. Connect the S.BUS device as shown in the
gure.
2. Turn on the transmitter power.
3. Call the setup screen.
Servo: System Menu
S.BUS servo
Sensor: Linkage Menu
Sensor
4. Perform setting in accordance with each
screen.
5. This sets the channel and other data for each
S.BUS servo, or telemetry device to be used
with the S.BUS device or receiver.
WARNING
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter power OFF
while S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor data is
being saved.
■ S.BUS servo and sensor save data will be lost,
resulting in malfunction.
40
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Systemmode
• System(FASSTest18CH etc.)
Type is displayed here.
Batteryvoltageforreceivers
• In FASSTest/T-FHSS mode, this
data displayed. RX voltage
and Ext voltage display
Thereceptionofthesignalfromthe
receivertothetransmitterisshown.
• This does not affect ight.
Timer1,Timer2
• Timer is displayed here.
Tap the time button to start/stop the
timer. (When the screen is tapped for
1 second, timer is reset to the initial
value.)
Home Screen
Digitaltrim(T1toT4)
Trim position is displayed
here.
ModelName
• The model name that
is currently used is
displayed here.
RF Indicator
User'sname
Systemtimer
• This shows the accumulated time
since the latest reset. (Each model /
Total)
(Hour):(Minute):(Second)
This is the Home screen and descriptions of its menus. Use your nger to operate the touch screen.
(Menu)
• Model menu
Tap the Icon to call Model
Menu screen.
(Menu)
• System
• Linkage
• Model select
Tap the button to call each Menu
screen.
BatteryIndicator
When battery is low, the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.
Condition name
• The condition name
that is currently used
is displayed here.
WARNING
Be sure to conrm the model name before ying your aircraft.
Check the battery voltage as often as possible and try to charge the battery earlier.
If the battery alarm makes a sound, land your aircraft immediately.
*You can adjust the LCD contrast by the display setting in the system menu.
41
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
LINK
Link Procedure (T16IZ/R7108SB)
Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order to start operation, the receiver must
be linked with the ID code of the transmitter to which it is being paired. Once the link is made, the ID code
is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used with another
transmitter. When you purchase additional R7108SB receivers, this procedure is necessary; otherwise the
receiver will not work.
Less than 0.5 m
In "Link" Mode
Receiver ON
Link procedure
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close
to each other within half (0.5m) meter.
2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [System type] at the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by tapping the screen.
4. When you use two receivers on one model,
you must change from [Single] to [Dual].
*Only two receivers can be used. In
"Dual", two setting items come out. Input,
respectively.
5. Battery fail-safe voltage can be changed
from the initial value of 3.8V here.
* Only in FASSTest/T-FHSS Mode.
6.[Link] is tapped. The transmitter will emit a
chime as it starts the linking process.
7. When the transmitter starts to chime, power
on the receiver. The receiver should link to
the transmitter within about 1 second.
8. If linking fails, an error message is displayed.
Bring the transmitter closer to the receiver
and repeat the procedure above from Step 2.
In Dual, a primary receiver (Rx1) is
linked first. Next, a secondary (Rx2)
receiver is linked.
ID of a primary
receiver displays.
ID of a secondary
receiver displays.
42
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
LINK
After setting, press a HOME/EXIT button
After setting
*If there are many FASSTest (T-FHSS) systems
turned on around your receiver, it might not
link to your transmitter. In this case, even if the
receiver's LED stays solid green, unfortunately
the receiver might have established a link
to one of other transmitters. This is very
dangerous if you do not notice this situation.
In order to avoid the problem, we strongly
recommend you to double check whether
your receiver is really under control by your
transmitter by giving the stick input and then
checking the servo response.
*Do not perform the linking operation when
the drive motor is connected or the engine is
running.
10. When a telemetry function is enabled,
the receiving interval (down-link interval)
of sensor data can be changed. If a D/
L interval is increased, the response of the
sensor data display becomes slower, but
stick response will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s
9. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.
It is INH when not using it.
*When you use two receivers, please be sure to
setup a "Rx1" and "Rx2" in the "dual" mode.
*Telemetry function cannot be used for the 2nd
receiver.
FASSTest18CH
*Telemetry function cannot be used for the dual
receiver.
T-FHSS, FASSTest12CH
*You must link one receiver at a time. If both
power supplies to the receivers are switched on
simultaneously, data is received incorrectly by
the transmitter.
*You cannot link three receivers.
*Link is required when a system type is
changed.
*Linking is required whenever a new model is
made.
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be
selected for Europe.
WARNING
After the linking is done, please cycle
receiver power and check that the
receiver to be linked is really under the
control of the transmitter.
Do not perform the linking procedure
with motor's main wire connected or
with the engine operating as it may
result in serious injury.
43
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Model ID
FASSTest, T-FHSS
For the sake of safety, this function does not operate the receiver if the model data of the model program
settings that does not match the aircraft is used by mistake.
In the system types (FASSTest, T-FHSS) compatible
with the model ID function, a unique ID number
(model ID) is set to each model data. Linking with
a receiver stores the model ID of the model data
in that receiver. The receiver operates only when
it receives radio waves transmitted using model
data that matches the stored model ID. As a result,
the receiver does not operate even if model data of
an unintended setting is used by mistake, so it is
possible to prevent a malfunction due to a model
selection mistake.
If you want to use different model data from the
model data that you have been using, link again.
Model ID feature is enabled only if the system type
is FASSTest or T-FHSS. Please note that model ID
function can not be used on other systems.
Link is required when a new model is made from a model selection.
Model 1 Receiver
Add new model data
Link
Select a model in Model Select. Link with a receiver that matches the model.
Link
Link
Model 2 Receiver
Model 3 Receiver
1:
3:
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
2:
1:
3:
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
2:
1:
3:
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
2:
Rx 1
Rx 2
Rx 3
Select Model 2
It works with different model data.
There is a risk of flying with different model data !
Select Model 2
Model 2 only works with Model 2 data.
There is no risk of flying with different model data.
Conventional system
Model ID
Operation
Operation
Rx 1
Rx 2
Rx 3
Operation
Operation
Not Operation
Not Operation
For safety reasons, model ID function can not be
disabled.
Model data that can be stored in internal memory is
up to 250 models.
Model ID is automatically set when copying or
adding model data.
R3004SB receiver does not support model ID
function. When using the R3004SB, set “Receiver”
in the system type screen T-FHSS mode setting to
[R3004SB]. When using other T-FHSS compatible
receivers, set "Receiver" to [Normal].
44
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Range Testing Your R/C System
It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to ensure
that everything is functioning as it should and to obtain maximum enjoyment from your time ying. The T16IZ
transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range check.
Range check mode
During this mode, the RF power output is reduced so the
range test can be performed. In addition, when this mode
is activated the right LED on the front of the transmitter
starts blinking and the transmitter gives users a warning
with a beeping sound.
The "Range check mode" continues for 60 seconds and
after that the power will return to the normal level. To
exit the "Range check mode" before the 60 seconds,
press the "HOME/EXIT" button. NEVER start flying
when the "Range check mode" is active.
Should you require additional time to perform a range
check, highlight Restart before your time expires and tap
the screen one time.
Range check procedure
1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk away from
the model while simultaneously operating the
controls. Have an assistant stand by the model
to confirm that all controls are completely and
correctly operational. You should be able to
walk approximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return to the
model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet accessible,
location so it will be within reach after starting the
engine or motor. Be certain the throttle stick is in
the low throttle position, then start the engine or
motor. Perform another range check with your
assistant holding the aircraft with the engine
running at various speeds. If the servos jitter or
move inadvertently, there may be a problem.
We would strongly suggest you do not y until the
source of the difculty has been determined. Look
for loose servo connections or binding pushrods.
Also, be certain that the battery has been fully
charged.
About 100 feet
Range check mode
Range checking on
low power.
WARNING
Do not y in the range check mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if the model
is too far from the transmitter, control will be lost and
the model will crash.
2. THR Stick Slow.
1. While pushing "U.MENU/MON." button.
4. Select "Range check" at the System menu.
5. "Start" tap.
6. The HOME/EXIT button is pressed
to end a range check.
3. T16IZ Power ON.
45
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Model addition and call
Initial setting assigns 1 model to the T16IZ
transmitter. The Model Select function is used to
add models and to select models which are already
set.
The data for up to 30 models can be saved
to the transmitter. Data can also be saved to the
optional microSD card.
The currently selected model name is displayed at the
top of the screen. Before ying and before changing any
settings, always conrm the model name.
2. Model type selection
Select the model type matched to the aircraft with the
Model type select function of the Linkage menu. For an
airplane, select the model type from among the 2 types:
airplane and glider. After the wing type is selected the
tail type select screen is displayed. Select the tail type
matched to the aircraft.
There are 13 wing types and 3 tail types for airplane
and glider.
3. Fuselage linkage
Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder, etc.
in accordance with the model's instruction manual.
For a description of the connection method, see the
"Servos connection by model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T16IZ is
different from that of our existing systems. Note
that even for the same "airplane model", when the
wing type and tail type are different, the channel
assignment may be different. (The channel assigned
to each function can be checked at the "Function"
of the Linkage menu.)
Airplane basic setting procedure
● If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu.
● Adjust the neutral position and control surface
angle with the linkage, and fine tune them
with the Sub trim and End point functions
(angle adjustment). To protect the linkage,
a limit position can also be set with the End
point function. The End point function can
adjust the amount of up/down and left/right
movement, limit, and servo speed of each
channel.
4. Throttle cut setting
Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by a
switch without changing the throttle trim position.
Set throttle cut with the Throttle cut function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the throttle cut function
and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle position so
that the carburetor becomes fully closed. For safety, the
throttle cut function operates the throttle stick in the 1/3
or less (slow side) position.
MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE
46
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
5. Idle down setting
The idling speed can be lowered with one touch by
a switch without changing the throttle trim position.
Perform this setting with the Idle down function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the Idle down function
and selecting the switch, adjust the idle down speed. For
safety, the idle down function acts only when the throttle
stick is slow side.
*While the Throttle cut function is in operation, the Idle down
function does not work.
6. AFR (D/R)
AFR function is used to adjust the throw and operation
curve of the stick, lever, and switch functions for each
flight condition. This is normally used after End point
has dened the maximum throw directions.
7. Airbrake
This function is used when an air brake is necessary
when taking o or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and aps (camber ap, brake ap)
oset amount can be activated by a switch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and flap
servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the speed of the
aileron, elevator, and flap servos can be adjusted. (In
side/Out side) A delay can be set for each condition,
and a cut switch which will turn OFF the delay can be
chosen. Trim amounts can be ne-tuned by setting a VR.
You can also set the auto mode, which will link Airbrake
to a stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or dial
can also be set as the ON/OFF switch.
8. Addition of ight conditions
The Condition select function automatically allocates
the Condition 1 for each model. Condition 1 is the
default condition and is the only one active when a new
model type is dened.
If you want to add ight conditions, please refer to a
description of the Condition select function.
*The Condition 1 is always on, and remains on until other
conditions are activated by switches.
*When a new condition is added, the model data of the
Condition 1 is automatically copied to the new condition.
*You can set the model data of new condition in the switch
ON state. However, if the group mode (Gr) was selected in
advance, the same data will be input at all the conditions.
Select the single mode (Sngl) and adjust only the condition
you want to change. For Group/Single mode switching, refer
to the description at the back of this manual.
*The Condition delay can be programmed for each channel.
The Condition delay is used to change the servo throw
smoothly when switching conditions.
47
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Model addition and call
Default setting assigns 1 model to the T16IZ. To add
new models or to call a model already set, use the Model
select function.
This is convenient when calling a model after
registering the model names in advance. (The data of up
to 30 models can be saved at the transmitter. Data can
also be saved to the optional microSD card.)
The currently called model is displayed at the top
of the screen. Before flying and before changing any
settings, always conrm the model name.
2. Model type and swash type selection
If a different model type is already selected, select
helicopter with the Model type function of the Linkage
menu, and then select the swash type matched to the
helicopter.
*The Model type function automatically selects the
appropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing
functions for the chosen model type. Eight swash types are
available for helicopters.
*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to the
Model type function.
Helicopter basic setting procedure
This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the T16IZ. Adjust the actual values, etc.
to match the fuselage used.
3. Flight condition addition
The transmitter can install up to eight flight
conditions per model.
The Condition select function automatically
allocates ve conditions for helicopter.
(General setting)
● Normal
● Idle up1
● Idle up2
● Idle up3
● Hold
Note: Delete conditions you have not set
up and will not use. Otherwise you may
accidentally activate them during ight and
cause a crash.
*For a description of the condition deletion, refer to the
Condition select function.
The Normal condition is always on, and remains on
until other conditions are activated by switches.
The priority is throttle hold/idle up 2/idle up 1/
normal. Throttle hold has the highest priority.
Add other conditions, as required.
The Condition delay can be programmed for each
channel. The Condition delay is used to change the
servo throw smoothly when switching conditions.
(Generalightconditionsettingexample)
● Normal: (Use initial setting conditions/operate
when switch OFF)
Use from engine starting to hovering.
● Idle up 1: (Operate at SW-E center)
Use in 540º stall turn, loop, rolling stall turn, and other
maneuvers.
● Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-E forward side)
Use in rolls.
● Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forward side)
Use in auto rotation.
48
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Swash plate correction (Except H-1 mode)
*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of the
linkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH
function.
5. Throttle/Pitch curve setting
This function adjusts the throttle or pitch operation
curve in relation to the movement of the throttle
stick for each condition.
<Throttlecurvesettingexample>
Call the throttle curve of each condition with the
condition select switch.
●Normal curve adjustment
Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that the
engine speed is constant and up/down control is
easiest.
●Idle up curve adjustment
The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).
●Throttle hold curve adjustment
The curve is not used when performing auto rotation
dives.
Conrm that the rate of the slowest position (0%) of
the stick is 0% (initial setting).
<Exampleofpitchcurvesetting>
Call the pitch curve of each condition with the
condition select switch.
●Pitch curve (Normal)
Make the pitch at hovering approximately +5
º
~6
º
.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
the 50% point as the standard.
*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function
and hovering pitch function together.
●Pitch curve (Idle up 1)
The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve
matched to airborne ight.
Set to -7
º
~+12
º
as standard.
4. Fuselage linkage
Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator,
pitch, and other servos in accordance with the
kit instruction manual. For a description of the
connection method, see "Servos connection by
model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T16IZ
is different from that of our existing systems.
(The channel assigned to each function can
be checked at the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.)
If the direction of operation of the servo is
incorrect, use the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.
Adjust the direction of operation of the gyro.
(Gyro side function)
Connect the throttle linkage so that the
carburetor can fully close at full trim throttle
cut.
Adjust the neutral position at the linkage
side and ne tune with the Sub-Trim function
and End point function (rudder angle
adjustment). To protect the linkage, a limit
position can also be set with the End point
function.
49
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
8. Throttle hold setting
*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the Throttle hold
function.
9. Throttle cut setting
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
engine, by ipping a switch with the throttle stick at
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s location
and direction must be chosen, as it defaults to INH.
*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until the
engine consistently shuts o, but throttle linkage is not binding.
10. Swash Mix corrects aileron,
elevator and pitch interaction
The swash mixing function is used to correct the
swash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic)
and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction
corresponding to each operation of each condition.
11. Throttle mixing setting
*If throttle mixing is necessary to compensate for engine
slowing caused when the swash plate operates at the same
time as ailerons or elevator, please refer to the Throttle
mixing function.
12. Other special mixings
●Pitch to Needle mixing
This mixing is used with engines that allow needle
control during ight (fuel-air mixture adjustment).
A needle curve can be set. The needle servo
rise characteristics at throttle stick acceleration/
deceleration operation can be adjusted.
(Acceleration function)
●Governor mixing
This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when a
governor is used. Up to 3 rates (speeds) can be
switched for each condition.
●Pitch curve (Idle up 2)
The high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is +8
º
.
●Pitch curve (Hold)
At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at both
the high and low sides.
[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7
º
~+12
º
6. AFR (D/R)
AFR (D/R) function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for each
condition.
*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the above-
mentioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"
This is normally used after End point has dened the
maximum throw directions.
7. Gyro sensitivity and mode switching
The gyro sensitivity and mode switching function
is dedicated gyro mixing of the Model menu, and
can be set for each condition.
●Normal condition (hovering): Gyro sensitivity
maximum
●Idle up 1/Idle up 2/Throttle hold: Gyro
sensitivity minimum
●However, at auto rotation of a tail-driven
helicopter, this function may not have any
effect at high gyro sensitivity.
50
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Servo Connection by Model Type
The T16IZ transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type
selected with the Model type function of the Linkage menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for
each model type is shown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.
*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage menu. The channel assignments can also be changed.
For more information, read the description of the Function menu.
Airplane/glider
●NormaltailandVtail
V-tail
Normal
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1
Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2
Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
3
Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Rudder Throttle Rudder Throttle Rudder
4
Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Aileron2 Rudder Aileron2 Rudder Aileron2
5
Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Gear Flap Gear Aileron3 Gear Aileron3
6
Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron2 Flap2 Aileron2 Aileron4 Aileron2 Aileron4
7
AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Flap Flap3 Aileron3 Flap Aileron3 Flap
8
AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 Gear AUX6 Flap2 Flap4 Aileron4 Flap2 Aileron4 Flap2
9
AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 Flap3 Motor Flap Motor Flap Flap3
10
AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 Flap4 AUX6 Flap2 AUX6 Flap2 Flap4
11
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Flap3 Motor
12
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 Flap4 AUX6
13
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5
14
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX4 AUX4
15
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX3 Buttery
16
AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
DG1
SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2
SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 18CH FASST MULT T-FHSS
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.
51
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
●Ailevator
Elevator 2 servo
Airplane/glider
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1
Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2
Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
3
Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
4
Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder
5
Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6
Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2
6
Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
7
Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2
Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3
8
AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Gear AUX6 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4
9
AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 Gear AUX6 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap Flap Flap
10
AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2
11
AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap3 Flap3
12
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Flap4 Flap4
13
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 Gear AUX6
14
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5
15
AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX2 Buttery AUX2 Buttery AUX4 Buttery
16
AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
DG1
SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2
SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 18CH FASST MULT T-FHSS
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.
52
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
●Taillesswing
Flying Wing
Airplane/glider
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
2AIL 2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder
5 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3
6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4
7 AUX5 AUX5 Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap Flap Flap
8 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5 Gear AUX6 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2
9 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 Flap3 Flap3
10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap4 Flap4
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX4 AUX4
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 Gear AUX6
13 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX5 AUX5
14 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX3 Buttery
15 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
16 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 18CH FASST MULT T-FHSS
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.
53
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
●TaillesswingWinglet2Rudder
* Output channels dier by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels,
there is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function
required out of the range of the arrow of a gure.
Rudder 2 servo
Airplane/glider
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
2AIL 2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAP
Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider
1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron
2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2
3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor
4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder
5 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3
6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4
7 AUX5 AUX5 Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap Flap Flap
8 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5 Gear AUX6 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2 Flap2
9 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX5 AUX5 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Flap3 Flap3
10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap4 Flap4
11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Rudder2 Rudder2
12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 Gear AUX6
13 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX5 AUX5
14 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX1 Buttery AUX3 Buttery
15 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber
16 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 18CH FASST MULT T-FHSS
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.
54
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Helicopter
●FASSTest12CH
The output
CH of each
system
CH
H-4/H-4X Swash All other
1 Aileron Aileron
2 Elevator Elevator
3
Throttle Throttle
4
Elevator2 Rudder
5 Pitch Pitch
6
Gyro Gyro
7 Governor
Governor
8 Rudder
Governor2
9
Gyro
2
Gyro
2
10
Gyro
3
Gyro
3
DG1
SW
DG2
SW
CH
H-4/H-4X Swash All other
1 Aileron Aileron
2 Elevator Elevator
3
Throttle Throttle
4
Rudder Rudder
5 Gyro Gyro
6
Pitch Pitch
7 Governor Governor
8 Elevator2 Governor
2
9 Gyro2 Gyro2
10 Gyro3 Gyro3
11 Governor
2 Needle
12
Needle AUX5
13
AUX4
14
AUX3
15
AUX2
16
AUX1
DG1
SW
DG2
SW
FASSTest 12CH
Multicopter
CH
Multicopter
1 Aileron
2 Elevator
3
Throttle
4
Rudder
5 Gyro
6 Gyro2
7 Gyro3
8 Camera TILT
9 Camera PAN
10 Camera REC
11
Mode
12
AUX5
13
AUX4
14
AUX3
15
AUX2
16
AUX1
DG1
SW SD
DG2
SW SA
The output
CH of each
system
●FASSTest18CH/FASSTMULTI/
FASST7CH/S-FHSS
The output
CH of each
system
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 18CH FASST MULT T-FHSS
FASST 7CH
S-FHSS
FASSTest 12CH
FASSTest 18CH FASST MULT T-FHSS
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.
55
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
The System menu sets up functions of the
transmitter. This does not set up any model data.
When the System menu button is tapped,
the menu shown below is called up. Tap the
function button that you want to enter.
SYSTEM MENU
System menu functions table
Display
Display adjustment.
Soundvolume
Adjust the volume of: Other sound, Warning, Voice
Systemtimer
Resets the system timer.
H/Wsetting
Stick mode selection (Mode 1 - Mode 4 ). J1-J4 sticks correction can be performed.
Battery
Battery alarm voltage setting. Auto power o󰮏 time setting.
Rangecheck
The output of the transmitter is lowered, for Range checking.
S.Busservo
S.Bus servo setting.
Information
Sets the User name, Language, and Unit system. Displays the program version, and microSD card information.
●Return to Home screen
56
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Display
The following LCD screen adjustments:
● Backlighting brightness adjustment
● Backlighting decrease time adjustment
● Touch screen calibration
● Tap the [Display] button in the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to System menu
Backlight max. brightness adjustment
1. Adjust the backlighting brightness with the
value input buttons.
*When the button is tapped, the backlighting becomes
brighter. When the button is tapped, the backlighting
becomes darker.
Backlight min. brightness adjustment
1. Adjust the backlight decrease brightness with
the value input buttons.
*When the button is tapped, the backlighting becomes
brighter. When the button is tapped, the backlighting
becomes darker.
*It cannot be made brighter than Backlighting brightness
adjustment.
Backlight decrease time
1. You can set a time period to decrease the
LCD backlight. This function counts the period
that the Touch Panel has been not operated.
This time can be set by ten-second steps. You
can also turn off the backlight decrease* if
you like.
*The backlight consumes a large amount of power. We
recommend that you turn off the backlight by setting the
backlight power-o time to about one minute.
Touch calibration
This function adjusts the location of the Touch
Panel. Press the "Touch calibration" button.
The calibration screen will then pop up.
Tap the center of the cross hair cursor on
the screen with the soft pen. As soon as the
system recognizes the position, the cursor
will move on to the next position. Repeat this
procedure as long as the cursor moves to next
position. You will do this ve times. Calibration
will be carried out based on the ve positions.
Disappearance of the cross hair cursor means
the calibration has been completed.
*In ordinary operation, this calibration is not necessary. If
you notice the Touch Panel is not functioning correctly after
long use, we recommend that you carry out this calibration.
57
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
●Return to System menu
Sound volume
Sound volume setting
This function can set the volume of "Other sound,"
"Warning," and "Voice," respectively.
● Tap the [Sound volume] button in the System
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
Sound volume Setting method
1. When the Sound volume box is tapped, the
above screen will appear.
The respective volume
control
Resets the timer
if pressed.
System timer reset
The system timer shows the total time
that has elapsed since the last "reset".
1. Tap "Total" or "Model" to choose reset.
2. Tap the [System timer] button.
3. Tap "Yes" in the next screen to reset the timer.
System timer
Integrating timer resetting
This function adjusts the system timer of the T16IZ
transmitter. The system timer can also be reset.
● Tap the [System timer] button in the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
*The system timer is displayed on the Home screen.
●Return to System menu
Total : Regardless of a
model, additional time in
case a power supply is ON
is displayed.
Model : The additional
time when the power
supply was set to ON is
displayed for every model.
2. You can change the sound volume by
tapping the "
▲▲
" "
"
"
▼▼
" "
" button
of four items.
*If you tap "
", the volume will increase. If you tap the
"
", the volume will decrease.
58
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Stick mode selection and J1-J4 sticks calibration
The stick is set at
neutral
Full right and
full bottom
Full left and
full top
H/W setting
Usually, this H/W setting is unnecessary.
Please perform this calibration only if a change at
the center of a stick should arise after prolonged use.
2. Choose the stick to calibrate right and left.
3. The stick is set at neutral and the [Set neutral]
button is tapped.
How to Calibrate
1. Tap the "Calibration" button.
*Please do not press the stick too rmly in any direction when
doing the calibration.
*Check after calibration to make sure that neutral is 0%, the
bottom right side is +100%, and the top left side is -100%.
● Tap the [Calibration] button in the System
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
System menu
4. The stick is held at full right and full bottom
(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button is
tapped.
5. The stick is held at full left and full top
(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button is
tapped.
Tapped
Tapped
Tapped
Stick mode
Mode 1-4 can be chosen.
But, it isn't changed until data is reset.
To change the mode the stick ratchet
must be changed. Request that this
be done by Futaba Service. (Charged
modication)
AIL
THR
RUD
ELE
MODE1
AIL
ELE
RUD
THR
MODE2
AIL
THR
RUD
ELE
MODE3
AIL
ELE
RUD
THR
MODE4
59
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Battery
Low battery alarm voltage set
*When the low battery voltage setting is changed, it is changed for
every model in the transmitter. A unique voltage cannot be set for
each model. A change in the low battery voltage setting also does
not reset other data.
Select the battery alarm voltage according to the
battery to be used.
Battery type change :
Lipo(2cells) Manual
setting
It isn't indicated in case
of manual setting.
Vibrator Types
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Auto power o time setting
This function prevents battery
discharging if the transmitter power
supply does not erase.
1. Adjust the auto power off time with
the value input buttons.
*When the time the transmitter is inactive reaches
the set time, the power is turned o automatically.
This time can be set up to 1 hour in 10 minutes
increments. The auto power o function can also
be deactivated.
*An audible alarm is sounded from 3 minutes
before auto power o. When a stick or switch is
operated, the alarm is cleared.
Refer to P.44
Range Check
Before a ight ground range check.
The 'range check mode' reduces the transmission
range of the radio waves to allow for a ground
range check.
*The range check mode, when activated, will continue for
60 seconds unless the user exits this mode early. When the
progress bar reaches 60 second mark, the RF transmission
automatically
returns to the normal operating power.
WARNING
Do not y in the range check
mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves is
short, if the model is too far from the
transmitter, control will be lost and the
model will crash.
●Return to System menu
When choosing manual
setting, the numerical
value can be input.
It's dangerous to
set it manually in
the low voltage.
60
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo
S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo
Procedure for changing S.BUS servo
setting
1. Select [S.Bus servo] of the System menu.
2. Wire the servo as shown in the gure above.
3. Press [Read]. The ID and current setting of
that servo are displayed.
S.Bus servo
S.BUS servo setting
● Call the following setting screen by pressing the
[S.BUS Servo] button in the System menu.
Servo ID number
If you use multiple S.BUS servos, only the desired
servo in the group can be set by entering the ID of
that specic servo.
An S.BUS(2) servo can memorize the channel and
various settings you input. Servo setting can be
performed on the T16IZ screen by wiring the servo
as shown in the gure.
* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions which
cannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display
screen will change. (Only the function which can be used by
a servo is displayed.)
* After reading completion, with connection of the above
gure, if a stick is moved, servo operation can be tested.
SERVO
SERVO
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
SERVO
SERVO
SERVO
4. When multiple servos are connected change
[INH] at the right side of the ID number on the
screen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Press [Write]. The settings are changed.
●Return to System menu
61
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.BUS Servo Description of each parameter's function
*There are functions that can and cannot be performed according to the servo type.
• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.
• Channel
Channel of the
S.BUS
system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.
• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.
• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the specified direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, the
first initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the specified position.
• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be specified. The "Hold" mode setting holds
the servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.
• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smooth
setting is used for normal flight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.
• Neutral Oset
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel is
restricted on one side.
• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matched
without being affected by motor fluctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servo's
operating voltage is increased.
• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be specified.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting
Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal
change.
Large Value Setting
Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current
consumption will increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.
Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.
• Boost
The minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small
travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be
immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting
Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large Value Setting
Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is too
large, operation will become rough.
62
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)
ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)
• Damper
The characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value
is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur,
depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs even
though the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to a
value larger than the initial value.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting
When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large Value Setting
When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel like
the servo response has worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo
will also be shortened.
• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target
position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small Value Setting
Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large Value Setting
Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.
• Buzzer
When a servo is powered up without a transmitter signal, a buzzer sounds.
(When transmitter signal is lost, a buzzer sounds until the servo regains the signal. This is not unusual.
The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply
The buzzer sound of about 1.25
Hz continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.
(
Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON. A buzzer may
sound by incorrect recognition.
)
Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more than
needed or do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.
WARNING
While S.BUS servo writes, you aren't
supposed to remove a connection of a
servo and turn o󰮏 a power supply of a
transmitter.
■ Data of S.BUS servo is damaged and breaks down.
63
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Fix and return to an
information screen.
Movement of a cursor of an input box
Input box
The program version and microSD card size are displayed. The User name,
language and Unit system used by the system can also be changed.
*If a microSD card is not inserted, no memory card
information will be displayed.
The Information screen displays the T16IZ system
program version information, microSD card
(memory size, card free size) information.
Tap the [Information] button at the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to System menu
Information
Telemetry numerical values can be displayed in
either metric or SAE (yard-pound) units.
This function registers the T16IZ user name and the
language displayed at proportional can be changed.
Registration of the user's name
T16IZ transmitter can register user's name.
How to register user's name
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
2. Select "user's name" and then the keyboard
will pop up.
3. You can use up to 15 characters as a user's
name. Use the keyboard on the screen to
enter user's name.
Back space (Input box)
2/2 : WEB Manual QR code
Next page
(Character list 2/4 - 4/4)
An input box is reset
The language displayed at proportional can
be changed. The initial setting is English, but
di󰮏erent languages can be selected.
[Metric]
Distance --- m (meter)
Speed --- km/h (kilometers per
hour)
Variometer --- m/s (meter per
second)
Temperature --- ℃ (centigrade)
[Yard]
Distance --- yard
Altitude --- feet
Speed --- mph (mile per hour)
Variometer --- fpm (ft per min)
Temperature --- ℉ (fahrenheit)
Telemetry Display Unit
1/2
Shift key Shift key
64
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
LINKAGE MENU
The Linkage menu is made up of functions which
perform model addition, model type selection, end
point setting, and other model basic settings.
Linkage menu functions table
Servomonitor
Displays the servo test and operation position
Modelselect
Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting
Modeltype
Model type, wing type, tail type, swash type, selection
Servoreverse
Servo direction reversal
Endpoint
Servo basic rate adjustment and limit setting
Servospeed
Servo speed setting
Sub-trim
Adjusts the neutral position of each servo
Function
Channel assignment of each function can be changed
Failsafe
Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting
Systemtype
System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, telemetry mode selection
Trimsetting
Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim
Throttlecut
Stops the engine safely and easily
Idledown
Lowers the idle speed of the engine
Swashring
Limits the swash plate travel to within a xed range. (helicopter only)
Swash
Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only except swash type H-1)
Stickalarm
Can be set so that an audible alarm sounds when the throttle stick reaches the set position.
Timer
Timer setting
Functionname
Function name can be changed
Sensor
Various telemetry sensors setting
Telemetry
Displays various data sent from the receiver
Tele.setting
Telemetry data log
Trainer
Starts and sets the trainer system.
Warningsetting
Mixing, throttle position warning reset
Usermenusetting
Original menu making
Datereset
Model memory set data reset (by item)
Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.
Tap the [Linkage menu] button in the Home
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
65
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Long press the [U.MENU/
MON.] button in the
Home screen to call the
setup screen shown.
<or>
Each channel movement can be checked.
Select the [OFF] or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button Testing is
stopped
[Neutral]: Mode which locks each servo in the
neutral position
[Moving]: Mode which repeats operation of
each servo
Servo monitor
Servo Test & Graph Display / Displays servo positions.
This is used for testing servo movement. “Moving
Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral Test” (fixed
position mode) are available.
The “Neutral Test” is good for nding the neutral
position of a servo horn.
In order to prevent any potential difficulties,
the servo test function will be inoperable, or
inaccessible, under certain conditions. Specically,
the Servo Test function is not operational if the
Throttle cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter
modes; or if the Throttle hold is ON in helicopter
mode.
Select [Servo monitor] at the linkage menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
WARNING
Don't set a servo test mode when the
drive motor is connected and the engine
has been started.
■Inadvertent rotation of the motor or acceleration of the engine
is extremely dangerous.
Test mode change :
OFF Neutral Moving
●Return to Home or
Linkage menu
66
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tap the [Model select]
button in the Home
screen to call the setup
screen shown below.
<or>
Current model is
green.
Model select
The Model selection function performs model addition, call,
deletion, copy, and model name setting.
This function is used to load the settings of the
desired model into the T16IZ’s memory.
The settings may be selected from either the
transmitters built-in memory. Remember that up to
30 model memories are available in the transmitter.
The model data of the microSD card is for storage.
microSD card model data cannot be called directly
from the transmitter. The name of the model stored
in the transmitter and the microSD card may be
changed. This can be very useful to tell different
models settings apart. Each model name can be as
long as 15 characters, and the model name always
appears in the display screen.
The Copy function is used to copy one set of model
data into a second memory within the transmitter
and the microSD card. It may be used for getting
a head-start on setting up models with almost the
same settings (only dierences need to be modied,
instead of entering the complete model from
scratch). Also, this function may be used to make a
backup copy of a model setup before any changes
are made.
● Select [Model select] at
the linkage menu and
call the setup screen
shown below.
Model addition
1. Tap the [New] button.
2. Tap [Yes] to add the model. (When you want
to cancel model addition, tap [No].)
*The added model is displayed in the model list.
*When a model is added, a receiver link is required.
"Save to"
[Internal]: transmitter
memory
[SD card]: microSD card
●Return to Home or
Linkage menu
67
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Model call
1. Tap the Internal or SD card. Select the
location to which the desired model is to be
saved.
2. Tap the desired model in the model list.
3. Tap the [Select] button.
4. Tap [Yes] to call the model. (When you want
to cancel model call, press [No].)
Model deletion
1. Tap the select model name or the model you
want to delete in the model list.
(The model currently selected cannot be
deleted.)
2. Tap the [Delete] button.
3. Tap [Yes]. (When you want to stop model
deletion, tap [No].)
Blue model would
be deleted.
Blue model was
deleted.
When using model data of T18SZ,
T16SZ, FX-36, FX-32
1.The microSD card in which the model data of
another transmitter is saved is displayed on
the model select screen.
T18SZ →       FX-32 →
T16SZ
FX-36
2.
Copy the model data of another transmitter
to T16IZ. The data will be converted for T16IZ.
3. Select the converted model data.
*The model data converted for T16IZ cannot be used in
another transmitter.
68
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
WARNING
Never launch the Model Selection function
while the engine is starting or the motor drive
wiring is connected.
Careless spinning of propellers or rotors is extremely
dangerous.
WARNING
Carefully check that the aircraft to be used and
the model selected match up.
Using a model which does not match the aircraft runs
the risk of the aircraft ying out of control and crashing.
Perform a careful operations check prior to ight.
Model name change
1. The model data chosen at current model
can be changed. The current model name,
tap.
2. When [Rename] is tapped, a keyboard
appears on the screen.
3. Enter the model name from this keyboard.
*Up to 15 characters can be input at the model name.
Model copy
1. The model data chosen at current model
can be copied. The current model name,
tap.
2. Tap the "Copy" button and tap the
destination button and select the copy
storage destination. (Internal or SD card)
3. When [Internal]or [SD card] is tapped,
copying is executed.
*If there is no model with the same name in the copy
destination, the name of the copied model is saved. If there
is a model of the same name, a number is added at the end
of the model name and the model is copied. You can change
the name later.
*Indication date : When the model data is copied, the creation
date for the current model is recorded.
*T16IZ can use model data of T16SZ, T18SZ, FX-36, FX-32.
Other transmitter model data is not available. However, if
the model data conversion function (described at the end of
this manual) is used, part of the model data of T14SG, FX-
22, T12K can be used.
Current model (green)
is chosen (blue).
Current model (green)
is chosen (blue).
add new copied model
Completion of rename
When you are done
renaming, tap Model name.
69
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Model type
This function selects the model type from among airplane, glider,
helicopter, and multicopter.
(The display screen is an example. The screen
depends on the model type.)
Seven types of main wings (six types of flying
wing) and three types of tail wings are available
for airplanes. Eight swash types are available
for helicopters. Seven types of main wings and
three types of tail wings are available for gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for each
model type are set in advance at the factory.
Note: The Model Type function automatically
selects the appropriate output channels, control
functions, and mixing functions for the chosen
model type.
When the Model Type Selection command is
accessed, all of the data in the active memory is
cleared. Be sure that you don’t mind losing this
data, or back it up to another memory using the
copying functions.
Select [Model type] at the linkage menu and call
the setup screen shown below.
When a data change will occur, the confirmation
screen of data initialization menu will be displayed.
A push on [yes] will initialize data and allow changes.
A push on [no] will stop data changes.
Model type selection
1. Model type selection [Model icon], tap.
2. Set the Model type, Wing type(Airplane/
Glider), Tail type(Airplane/Glider), or Swash
type(Helicopter) by using the appropriate
button.
3. Set the type you choose by tapping
[Enter]→[Yes] at the confirmation screen.
(When you want to cancel model type
selection, tap [No].)
●Return to Linkage
menu
1. [Enter], tap
2. [Yes], tap
70
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Set the type you
choose by tapping.
Airplane/Glider : Choose the
wing type and tail.
Helicopter : Choose the
swash type.
71
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.
Tap the “Yes”
Reverse
Tap the [Servo reverse] button in the Linkage
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
Servo Reverse
Use to reverse the servo throw direction.
(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)
Servo Reverse changes the direction of an
individual servo’s response to a control stick
movement.
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the section
on Swash AFR before reversing any servos. With
CCPM helicopters, always complete your servo
reversing prior to any other programming. If you
use pre-built Airplane/Glider functions that control
multiple servos, it may be confusing to tell whether
the servo needs to be reversed or a setting in the
function needs to be reversed. See the instructions
for each specialized function for further details.
Always check servo direction prior to every ight
Servo reversing procedure
After setting up a new model, be sure to dene all
special menus. Be sure that all servos are plugged
into the proper receiver channels. Now, determine
whether you need to reverse any channels by
moving each stick and observing the corresponding
movement in the model’s controls.
as an additional precaution to conrm proper model
memory, hook ups, and radio function.
WARNING
Before a ight, always check that your
model's servo operation, the direction
of control surfaces, and switch setup
are correct.
Default setting of the throttle/motor
channel is always reverse.
1. Tap the desired channel’s setting button to
choose the proper direction for the servo.
2. Tap “Yes” in the next screen.
3. Repeat for each servo needing reversal.
When done, tap “Servo reverse” to return to
the Linkage menu.
●Return to Linkage menu
72
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tap the values you
wish to adjust and
value input buttons
will appear on-screen.
Travel rate Limit point
Next page
Ch7-16
Left / Top Right / Bottom
30
140%
30
140%
Indicates the current
direction of the stick, etc.
Tap the [End point] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup
screen shown below.
End point
Sets the travel, limit point.
(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)
The End point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates dierential throws, and will
correct improper linkage settings.
The travel rate (normal full stick movement at high
rates) can be varied from 30% to 140% in each
direction on channels 1 to 16. Also, the limit point
(how far the servo travels when a mix is involved)
where servo throw stops may be varied from 0% to
155%.
Servo travel adjustment
1. Tap the travel button of the channel you
want to set. Value input buttons appear on
the screen.
2. Use these buttons to adjust the rate.
●Initial value: 100%
●Adjustment range: 30%~140%
3. Repeat the procedure above for each rate.
Limit point adjustment
1. Tap the limit button of the channel you want
to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the limit
point.
●Initial value: 135%
●Adjustment range: 0%~155%
3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.
●Return to
Linkage menu
73
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Servo speed
Sets the speed of each servo.
The Servo speed setting is used to set the servo
delay for each channel, from channel l to channel
16. The system uses the programmed speed (delay)
to slow down servo position changes. The Servo
Servo speed setting
1. Tap the speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
●Initial value: 0
●Adjustment range: 0~27 (steps)
speed setting can be varied from 0 to 27 in each
channel.
Tap the [Servo speed] button in the Linkage
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.
To close this screen, tap the [Servo speed]
button.
● Tap the [Sub-trim] button in the Linkage menu to
call the setup screen shown below.
Sub-trim
Setting of neutral position of each servo.
The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fine
adjustments to the control surface after linkages
Sub-trim adjustment
1. Tap the trim display part of the channel you
want to adjust.
Value input buttons appears on the Sub-trim
menu screen.
and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set to
their center position.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the sub
trim.
●Initial value: 0
●Adjustment range: -240~+240 (steps)
*See above
3. Repeat this step for each channel.
●Return to Linkage menu
●Return to Linkage menu
(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)
74
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tap the [Function] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
Function
Channel assignment for each function can be changed to suit your needs.
When you select model and wing (swash) types,
you will find that the optimized combinations of
servo output channels and functions have been
already preset. If you would like, on the function-
setting screen of the linkage menu, you can freely
change combinations of servo output channels,
functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and input
controllers (sticks, switches, trim levers and trim
switches). You can also assign the same function to
multiple servo output channels such as assigning
elevator function to CH2 and CH3.
Function change
1. Tap the function button of the channel you
want to change to call the Function select.
2. Select the function you want to change.
DG1,DG2(switchchannels)
These two channels can be used as switch (On/
O) channels. You can freely change combinations
between servo output channels and input controllers
(sticks, switches, trim levers and trim switches).
ChannelrestrictionsbyaSystemType
FASSTest 18CH---16 CH+2 Switch
FASSTest 12CH---10 CH+2 Switch
FASST MULTI ---16 CH+2 Switch
FASST 7CH --- 7 CH
S-FHSS --- 8 CH
T-FHSS ---16 CH+2 Switch
Operation control change
1. Tap the control button of the channel you
want to change. A control select screen
(stick, switch, knob, trim lever, etc.) is
displayed.
2. Select the control you want to operate.
*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.
●Return to
Linkage menu
75
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
The Motor function is used when switching the
motor ON/OFF (mostly for motor gliders). For
most EP planes, the throttle can be left as-is when
controlling the motor by stick. This means that the
various throttle-related functions are usable via
motor control.
Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.
Tap the “Yes”
H/W reverse
Trim change
1. Tap the trim button to call the trim setup
screen.
H/W reverse
2. The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen.
Hardware setting (Selection of switch, etc.
which controls trim)
● Rate setting
● Trim mode setting
Normal mode: Normal trim (linear) operation
ATL mode: ATL operation mode. (Works at only one
end of operation) Reverse is also possible.
Center mode: Maximum change near center by
center trim operation (Does not change at end of
the stick movement)
This function reverses the operation signal of the
sticks, switches, trim levers, and knobs.
Note: This setting reverses the actual operation
signal, but does not change the display of the
indicators on the display. Use the Normal mode as
long as there is no special reason to use the reverse
mode.
76
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Tap the [Fail safe] button in the Linkage menu to call the setup screen shown below.
Fail safe
Sets the servos' operating position when transmitter signals can no
longer be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.
The Fail safe function is used to set up positions
that the servos will move to in the case of radio
interference. Denes servo position when signals are
lost and when receiver battery voltage becomes low.
You may set either of two positions for each channel:
Hold, where the servo maintains its last commanded
position, or fail safe, where each servo moves to
a predetermined position. You may choose either
mode for each channel.
The T16IZ system also provides you with an
advanced battery monitoring function that warns
you when the receiver battery has only a little
power remaining. In this case, each servo is moved
to the dened failsafe position. The battery failsafe
may be released by operating a predened control
on the transmitter (default is throttle). Do not
continue to y. Land as soon as possible. Remember,
if the predefined control suddenly moves to a
Fail safe setting procedure
Decide which channels you want to go to preset
positions, and which ones you want to maintain
their last commanded position. To select the fail
safe mode you wish to set, use the F/S button. This
button toggles between the two modes. (Hold, F/S)
F/Smodesetting:
1. Tap the F/S button of the channel you want
to set, and set that channel to the [F/S]
mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, control, slider,
or other control in the position you want the
servo to move to when the fail safe function
is activated, and tap the F/S position button.
That position is displayed in percentage.
*When you want to return that channel to the Hold mode, tap
the [F/S] button again.
Battery fail safe setting procedure
To select the B.F/S mode, tap the [B.F/S] button.
Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between
[OFF] and [B.F/S].
B.F/Ssetting:
position you did not command, land at once and
check your receiver battery.
Do not continue to fly. Land as soon as possible.
Defines servo position when signals are lost and
when receiver battery voltage becomes low.
WARNING
For safety, always set the fail safe functions.
■Especially set the throttle channel fail safe function so that the
servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes and to the
slow side from the hovering position for helicopters. Crashing
of the model at full high when normal radio waves cannot be
received due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.
■If fail safe is reset by throttle stick movement, the fail safe
may be mistaken as an engine malfunction and will be reset
at low throttle and the model will continue to y. If you have
any doubts, immediately land.
1. Tap the [B.F/S] button of the desired channel
to set it to the B.F/S mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, VR, slider,
or other control in the position you want
the servo to move to when the battery fail
safe function is activated, and tap the F/S
position button. This position is displayed in
percentage.
*When you want to return that channel to OFF, tap the [B.F/S]
button again.
Battery Fail safe release function
This function releases the predened control from
its held position after indicating that your receiver
battery is low.
1. Enter the control setting screen by tapping
the Battery F/S release button. Now, you may
choose whether moving the throttle resets
the condition, or select a stick or switch to
deactivate it. To set a desired throttle release
position, move the throttle stick to the point
at which you wish the B.F/S to be released.
●Return to
Linkage menu
77
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SystemTypeselection
The T16IZ is for 2.4 GHz only. The system can
be changed from among 6 choices: FASSTest
18CH, FASSTest12CH, FASST MULTI, FASST
7CH, T-FHSS, S-FHSS. It is FASSTest18CH and
FASSTest12CH which can be chosen by R7108SB
set. The method of selection is on the next page.
*If you change the System type, other model data is not reset.
*After any change, remember to test the model and fully
check servo direction and motion.
*Analog servos cannot be used with the R7108SB in the
FASSTest12CH mode.
System type
System mode setting, Receiver link
Receiverlinking
The receiver will only be controlled (without being
aected by other transmitters) by the transmitter it
is linked to. When using a receiver other than one
purchased as a set, linking is necessary.
Moreover, a re-link is required when a new model
is added by model selection, and at the time of
system type change.
Dualreceiverfunction(onlyFASSTest18CH)
Dual receivers can be linked with the T16IZ.
Two receivers are recognized individually by ID
numbers. For example, in R7108SB, CH output
setting function is used, by setting the first as as
"1-8CH", and setting the second as "9-16CH".
Two sets of receivers can be used as a set in the
model, allowing you 16 channels. Separate fail-safe
voltage can be set to each receiver.
However, telemetry cannot be used for the 2nd
receiver.
Batteryfail-safevoltagesetup(FASSTest/T-FHSS
modeonly)
The voltage at which battery fail-safe activates can
be set when you link. (3.5-8.4 V) The receiver
memorizes the setting as it was at link.
Since power consumption varies with battery type,
servos and condition, please select the fail-safe
activation voltage for your own model.
Select [System type] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below.
P.41
Linking method
Cases when linking is necessary:
When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
When the communication system was changed.
(FASSTest18CH
FASSTest12CH etc.
)
When a new model was created by model
selection.
Telemetryfunction(FASSTest/T-FHSSmodeonly)
To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry” to
“ACT”.
DLInterval(FASSTestmodeonly)
When a telemetry function is enabled, the receiving
interval (down-link interval) of sensor data can be
changed.
If a DL interval is increased, the response of the
sensor data display becomes slower, but stick
response will improve.
●Return to
Linkage
menu
*FASSTMULTI/FASST7CHcannotbeselectedforEurope.
78
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
System type
FASSTest 18CH ---
FASSTest 12CH ---
FASST MULTI ---
FASST 7CH --- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.
T-FHSS Air ---
S-FHSS --- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.
FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up
to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.
T-FHSS system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to
18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.
FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to
12 channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used,
but the response speed is faster than that of the 18CH mode.
FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2)
can be used.
Analog servos cannot be used with the R7108SB in the FASSTest 12CH mode.
CRSF Protocol for TBS
T16IZ has been made compatible with the CRSF
(TBS) protocol.
*Bidirectional communication function of CRSF is not supported.
*When using CRSF, the S.BUS servo setting function and
[Reload] [Register] [Change slot] functions cannot be used.
When setting S.BUS servo and sensor, set CRSF to INH.
Tap the "CRSF" button to [ON]. A signal
conforming to the CRSF standard is
output from the S.BUS setting connector
(S.I/F) of the transmitter.
WARNING
Futaba is not responsible for damage
sustained by combination with
parts other than Futaba Genuine
equipment.
● Call page 2/2 from the [System type] menu.
*FASSTMULTI/FASST7CHcannotbeselectedforEurope.
79
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Trim setting
Digital trim settings
This function adjusts the digital trim's control step
amount and operation mode (T1-T4).
Control step amount setting
1. To set the control step amount, first tap the
screen to the data input mode.
Set the control step amount by tapping the
"
▲▲
" "
"
"
▼▼
" "
" button.
Initial value: 4
Adjustment range: 1~200
(When the value is tapped, the control step
amount is reset to the initial value.)
*When the value is made large, the change per step becomes
larger.
Separate/combination mode selection
[Comb.]: Combination mode. The trim data
are reected at all the ight conditions.
[Separ.]: Separate mode. Trim adjustment for
each ight condition.
Select [Trim setting] at the linkage menu and call
the setup screen shown below.
When the flight conditions are set, the trim
operation can be coupled with any of the conditions
selected through combination mode.
●Return to Linkage
menu
80
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Tap the [Throttle cut] button in the Linkage menu to
call the setup screen shown below.
Throttle cut
Stops the engine safely and easily.
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
engine, by ipping a switch with the throttle stick at
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s location
and direction must be chosen, as it defaults to "
-"
.
Throttle cut setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button.
2. Throttle cut function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the <Hardware
select> screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] at
the back of this manual.)
3. Throttle cut position setting:
Tap the cut position button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the cut
position rate.
●Initial value: 17%
●Adjustment range:
LOW
0%~50%
Middle
*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the rate until the engine
consistently shuts o.
To exit the setting, tap the [Throttle cut]
button.
The yellow line is the
cut position. When
the cut switch is ON,
the throttle will move
to this position.
Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the throttle cut switch
and ON-OFF direction.
This indicates the throttle stick's current
position. Throttle cut will only function
when the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd
into the slow throttle range.
Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.
●Return to
Linkage menu
This is the throttle cut
position. Tapping this
will display value input
buttons on-screen. Set
the engine stop position.
81
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.
Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the idle down switch
and ON-OFF direction.
This is the current position bar for the
throttle stick. Throttle cut will only
function when the throttle stick is more
than halfway into the low throttle range.
This is the idle down
throttle position. Tapping
this will display value input
buttons on-screen. Set the
engine's max. low position.
Range:
(↑)-100 +100(↓)
Pressing and holding a
value will reset it to 0.
Idle down
Lowers the engine idling speed.
The Idle down function lowers the engine's idle
by ipping a switch with the throttle stick at idle.
The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid
accidental dead sticks. The switch’s location and
direction must be chosen, as it defaults to "
-- "
.
● Select [Idle down] at the linkage menu
and call the setup screen shown below.
Idle down setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button to activate the Idle
down function.
2. Idle down function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the <Hardware
select> screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] at
the back of this manual.)
●Return to Linkage menu
3. Offset rate setting:
Tap the offset rate button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the offset rate.
●Initial value: 0%
●Adjustment range: -100%~100%
*(-)becomes an idle up.
To exit the setting, tap the [Idle down]
button.
Landing
Idling, lower
Offset rate
82
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
The marker represents
the stick's position.
The movement range
display shows control
input for elevator and
aileron direction.
Setting the function to
"ACT" will display the
swash ring and [Rate]
percentage.
●Tap the [Swash ring] button in the Linkage menu to
call the setup screen shown below.
Swash ring
Limits the swash travel within a xed range to prevent linkage damage
(Helicopter only)
This function limits the travel of the swash plate to
prevent linkage damage as the aileron and elevator
operation is used. It is useful for 3D heli setting.
Swash ring setting procedure
1. Push the Swash ring button on the linkage
menu.
2. Push ACT/INH button to activate.
*The movement area monitor shows the current aileron and
elevator values and limit ranges by the yellow circle.
3. Adjust the rate to the maximum amount of
swash plate decline.
*The swash movement is limited within the circle.
Adjustment range: 50 - 200%.
●Return to
Linkage menu
83
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Swash
Swash operation linkage correction function (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1).
NeutralPoint
At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates from
a perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage
compensation functions in this menu may not
compensate effectively. To correct this use the
neutral point function. This will move the neutral
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
position. However, this adjustment changes only
the axis point of the compensation functions in this
menu, and does not affect the neutral position of
other functions.
SwashAFR
Swash AFR function reduces/increases/reverses the
rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator and collective
pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing the
motion of all servos involved in that function, only
when using that function.
Mixing Rate
This compensation mixing is used to correct the
tendency of the swash-plate for each control. The
following compensation mixing is possible: PIT
to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL, and
ELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swash-
plate to operate correctly for each control using the
corresponding compensation mixing.
LinkageCompensation
This compensation mixing is used to correct the
tendency of the swash-plate for pitch control at low
pitch and high pitch.
SpeedCompensation
This function is used to cancel the reaction that is
generated by the dierence of the operation amount
of each servo when the swash-plate moves.
Select [Swash] at the linkage menu and call the
setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu
84
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Neutral point setting procedure
*Becomes the compensation reference point.
*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point position is
near the 50% position makes the mixing amount small.
1. Hold the servo horn at a right angle to the
linkage rod, and then tap the [Enter] button
and read the actual neutral point.
*The neutral point is displayed on the screen.
After reading this neutral point, use other
compensation functions to make further
adjustments.
To exit the setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Swash AFR setting procedure
Adjust so that the specified operation
amount is obtained by aileron, elevator, and
pitch operation.
1. Tap the button of the AFR rate to be
adjusted. Value input buttons appear on the
screen.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the AFR
rate.
Initial value: +50%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
+or- the direction of operation changes.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Mixing rate setting procedure
HR-3 is described as an example. The mixing
applied in other swash modes is different, but
the setting procedure is the same.
1. Set the throttle stick to the set neutral point.
Adjust the length of the linkage rod so that
the swash plate is horizontal at this position.
*A little adjustment using sub trim should be OK.
*Adjust so that pitch operation when the pitch curve
is straight is maximum.
2. Adjust the AIL->PIT amount so there is no
interference in the elevator or pitch direction
when the aileron stick is moved to the left
and right.
*Adjust the left and right sides separately.
3. Adjust the ELE->AIL and ELE->PIT amounts so
there is not interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
*Adjust the up and down sides separately.
4. Adjust the PIT->AIL and PIT->ELE amounts so
that the swash plate is horizontal when the
throttle stick is set to maximum slow and full
high.
*Adjust the slow and high sides separately.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Linkage correction setting procedure
*Set the linkage compensation after setting the mixing
rate.
*This function compensates for elevator interference
by aileron operation or aileron interference by
elevator operation at Low pitch and Hi pitch at
collective pitch (HR3, etc.) control.
1. Set the throttle stick to the maximum slow
position. Move the aileron stick to the left and
right and adjust the aileron compensation
amount so that interference in the elevator
or pitch direction at that time is minimal.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted separately.
*If the interference increases when the compensation
amount is increased, make the compensation
direction "-".
2. Adjust the elevator compensation amount
so that the interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down is minimal.
3. Perform aileron and elevator compensation
similarly for the throttle stick full high side.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Speed compensation setting procedure
1. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. Move the elevator stick quickly and
adjust the speed compensation amount so
that the interference in the pitch direction is
minimal.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Notes:
If the linkage is too long or short, correct
compensation will not be applied. Correct
this before continuing. The pitch angle
changes after any adjustment. Reset the
pitch angle when actually flying after
compensation processing.
85
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tapping this will change
INH to ON and activated.
Stick alarm 
An alarm (single beep) can be sounded at the
specied throttle stick position.
●Alarm function ON/OFF can be set by switch.
Tapping this will pull up the hardware selection
screen. Select the switch and ON-OFF direction if
turning the function ON-OFF by switch.
This is the current
position display bar for
the throttle stick.
This is the throttle stick
alarm position. Push the
throttle stick to the desired
position and tap the value.
Range:
(Low)0 100(High)
If the throttle stick
reaches the yellow
line, an alarm will
sound.
If the throttle stick
reaches the desired
position , an alarm
(single beep) will
sound.
●Return to Linkage menu
86
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Target time
Time
Alarm :
Last ten secondsLast twenty seconds
One short
beep
Two short
beeps
Also
beep
Continue counting
with displaying a
minus (-) sign.
Timer
Timer setting
The Timer function may be set for
any desired time, i.e. engine run time,
specified times for competitions, etc.
Two independent timers are provided
for your use. The timers are stored
independently with each model, meaning
that when you switch between model
setups, the timer associated with the new
model is brought up automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stop
from the motion of any switch or stick.
You may set the ON and OFF directions
freely. Each timer has a capacity of up to
59 minutes 59 seconds.
Each timer may be set for count-down or count up operation
with a target time.
If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set time, a
buzzer sound for each count is generated.
A timer on the home screen starts and stops its countdown
directly from there when tapped. Tapping and holding the
display will reset the timer.
[Start/Stop] → Home screen
Timer 1 Timer 2
A Buzzer or Speech
can be chosen
Up timer/Down timer selection
1. Tap the mode button and select the type of
timer.
2. Timer time setting.
Tap the Mode minutes or seconds button.
Value input buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to set the timer time.
Start/Stop/Reset switch setting
1. Tap the Start/Stop/Reset SW "--" button to
call the <Switch> screen, and then select the
switch and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] at
the back of this manual. The timer switches
can be set for each condition.)
[Inhibit] → [Type1-4] 
If it carries out like this,
a vibration function
will work.
Select [Timer] at the linkage menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu
OFF: Turning the power OFF and switching models will reset the timer.
ON: Previous timer is put into memory and will restart from where it stopped.
Elapsed: Minute-by-minute
alarm starting from 00:00
Remainder : Minute-by-
minute alarm counting down
from a designated time
Constant: The alarm
does not stop
One time: Stop the
alarm at once
87
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
INT (integration) Timer is the function which changes progress of a timer according to the location
of the throttle stick. When the throttle stick is raised for faster speed, the speed of the timer usually
increases. With the throttle stick at mid-range speed, the timer speed decreases (to 50%). When the
throttle is positioned at low end, the timer's progress stops. It's possible to set it in the time which
ts power consumption of your fuselage.
*The consumption of the battery/fuel is different depending on the conditions, so use an INT Timer as
reference.
*The INT (integration) time is different from the actual elapsed time.
High
Middle
Low
Whenathrottlestickisthe
highside,thespeedofthe
timerusuallyincreases.
Whenathrottlestickis
middle-speed,thetimer
speeddecreases(by50%).
Whenathrottlestickislow,
timerprogressstops.
NomalTimer
TH%:
IntegrationTimer
IntegrationTimer
Select [Timer] at the linkage menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
Tap
INT time (%)
INT Time
88
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tap the [Function name] button in the Linkage
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
Function name
Function name can be changed
The name of the spare functions (Auxiliary 1-8)
can be changed for the full name (10 characters) or
for the abbreviated name (4 characters).
Function name change method
1. Select [Function name] from the Linkage
menu and tap the screen.
2. The Function name setup screen is displayed.
3. When the function whose name is to be
changed is selected and the screen is
tapped, a modication screen is displayed.
4. Select the function to be renamed and
select [Rename] and tap the screen. A
character input screen is displayed. Input the
function name.
5. When [Reset] is selected and the screen is
held down, the function name is set to the
initial state function name.
6. The function name may be displayed in 10
characters or 4 characters, depending on
the setup screen. For 4-character display,
input the function name as required.
●Return to Linkage menu
89
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Viewing the telemetry data 
Telemetry system
Home display
Receiver voltage and
Ext voltage display
This screen displays and sets the various information from the receiver. An alarm and vibration can be
generated depending on the information. For example, a drop in the voltage of the receiver battery housed
in the aircraft can be reported by an alarm.
● This function can only be used in the FASSTest18CH mode and T-FHSS mode. The FASST/S-FHSS mode cannot use
telemetry.
● FASSTest12CH mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display.
● Telemetry sensors sold separately can be mounted in the aircraft to display a variety of information. (Receiver voltage
does not require a sensor.)
● The telemetry function cannot be used if the telemetry mode of the parameters is not ACT.
● FASSTest18CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry cannot be used for the 2nd receiver.
● T-FHSS/FASSTest12CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry function cannot be used.
● If the transmitter and receiver are linked, but the receiver's ID is not recorded in the transmitter's memory, the telemetry
function cannot be used.
● Turning OFF the receiver after use will cause the telemetry data just prior to this to be displayed. (Even when the
receiver's power is turned OFF, the receiver voltage is not 0.0 V.)
Viewing the receiver voltage. Setting is unnecessary. When menu telemetry
is listened to, the voltage appears.
Viewing the drive battery
voltage.
CA-RVIN-700 and wiring work are necessary.
Using various optional
telemetry sensors.
Optional telemetry sensors are necessary.
T16IZ setting is unnecessary.
Using several telemetry
sensors of the same type.
Setting by "sensor" in the menu is necessary.
(Register is necessary.)
Setting alarms from the
telemetry information.
Setting by "Telemetry" in the menu is
necessary.
P.89
P.96
P.91
P.92
P.95 ~ 112
CAUTION
Do not stare at or set the transmitter
setting screen while ying.
Losingsightoftheaircraftduringightisvery
dangerous.
Whenyouwanttochecktheinformation
duringight,callthetelemetryscreen
beforeightandhavethescreencheckedby
someoneotherthantheoperator.
Receiver Transmitter. The reception of the signal
from the receiver to the transmitter is shown. This
does not a󰮏ect ight.
90
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Home
display
*Be aware that pressing and holding this activates the key lock
Telemetry Schematic
You can choose
which type of sensor
to display for four
displays. Tap the sensor
type.
For some sensor types,
you can choose the
display item. Tap to
select.
Drive battery
CA-RVIN-700
S.BUS2
port
Temperature
Sensor
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3 ~ 5
Slot 6 ~7
Slot 8 ~ 15
Slot 16
Receiver
Battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
Drive battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
Switch
Terminal box
Hub
Hub
Hub
Info
Info
Info
Info
Info
Signal
RPM
Sensor
Altitude
Sensor
GPS
Sensor
Voltage
Sensor
Slot 17
Slot 31
***Sensor
***Sensor
Info
with external power
input must be less than 70V
Branch
Fuse
Motor
Controller
T16IZ
16 of telemetry data is displayed
HOME/EXIT is pushed
91
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Registered sensorSlot Number
This is what displays when no
sensor is registered in a slot.
Tapping the slot and selecting
"-----------" will erase whatever was
registered there, freeing up the
slot.
Tap the slot to display
sensors which can be used
for the start slot. Tap to
register the sensor.
Sensor ID : Multiple usage of sensors
of the same type requires an ID
be input. Tapping this will allow
for manual input, but see the next
page about how to perform auto-
registration via sensor registration.
Sensor
Various telemetry sensors setting
This screen registers the telemetry sensors used
with the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting it
to the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
When using 2 or more of the same kind of sensor,
they must be registered here.
[Whatisaslot?]
ServosareclassifiedbyCH,butsensorsare
classiedinunitscalled“slot”.Thereareslotsfrom
No.1toNo.31.
Altitudesensors,GPSsensorsandotherdata
sensorunitsmayusemultipleslots.
Whenusingasensorwhichusestwoormore
slots,therequirednumberofslotsisautomatically
assignedbysettingupastartslot.
When2ormoreofthesamekindofsensorare
used,thesensorsthemselvesmustallocateunused
slotsandmemorizethatslot.
As shown in the table below, an altimeter requires 3 contiguous slots and a GPS sensor
requires 8 contiguous slots. The GPS (SBS-01/02G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24.
Assignable slot
*Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.
*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.
● Tap the [Sensor] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
Sensor
The required number
of slots
The number which can be used as a start slot Selling area
TEMP (SBS-01T/TE) 1 slot 1-31
Global
RPM (SBS-01RM/RO/RB) 1 slot 1-31
Airspeed (SBS-01TAS) 1 slot 1-31
Voltage (SBS-01V) 2 slots
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
Altitude (SBS-01/02A) 3 slots
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
Current (SBS-01C) 3 slots
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
S.BUS Servo sennsorSBS-
01S)
6 slots
1,2,8,9,10,16,17,18,
24,25,26
GPS(SBS-01/02G) 8 slots 8,16,24
EM-100 (O.S. ENGINE) 12 slots 8,16
TEMP125-F1713 1 slot 1-31
Europe
VARIO-F1712 2 slots
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
VARIO-F1672 2 slots
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
CURR-F1678 3 slots
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
GPS-F1675 8 slots 8,16,24
Kontronik ESC 8 slots 8,16,24
Castle TL0 8 slots 8,16,24
JetCat V10 14 slots
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,
18
PowerBox 16 slots 8,16
92
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sensor:Reload
● Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
When using multiple sensors of the same type
the sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
Connect all the sensors to be used to the T16IZ as
shown in the gure at the right and register them by
the following procedure. The ID of each sensor is
registered in the transmitter.
Hub
Hub Hub
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
Reading all the sensors to be used
1. Connect the sensor to the T16IZ as shown in the gure above.
2. Tap “Reload” on page 3/3 of the [Sensor] screen.
3. Tap “Reload”.
All the sensors are registered and can be used.
*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections like
a T18MZ/T14SG.
Sensor : Register
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
This function registers an additional sensor.
Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at the
right and register it by the following procedure.
The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.
SENSOR
Additional sensor registration
1. Connect the sensor to the T16IZ as shown in the gure above.
2. Tap “Register” on page 3/3 of the <Sensor> screen.
3. The sensor is registered and can be used.
*When the number of slots needed in registration is insufficient, an error is
displayed and registration cannot be
performed. Disable unused slots or
perform the following reload.
● Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
●Return to
Linkage menu
●Return to
Linkage menu
93
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
*For some transmitters (e.g., T6K), when the start slot of a
sensor is changed, the sensor cannot be used.
WARNING
This procedure changes the slot number of one
registered sensor.
Sensor slot change
1. Connect the sensor to the T16IZ as shown in
the gure above.
2. Tap “Change slot” on page 3/3 of the
<Sensor> screen.
3. Tap “Read”.
4. A sensor details screen appears.
5. The current start slot is displayed. To change
a start slot, a
button, tap.
Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like the
table of all pages.
6. Tap to the “Write”.
Sensor : Change slot
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors
of the same type.
SENSOR
● Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
Tap the [Change slot] button
in the Sensor screen to call the
setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter
power OFF while telemetry sensor data
is being saved.
Sensor save data will be lost, resulting in
malfunction.
94
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Display Sensors
Default display sensors can only be used by
connecting the sensors to the receiver. For display
of other sensors or to use the same type of sensor in
multiple cases, either register them via the "Sensor"
option on the Linkage menu or allocate the sensors
to empty slots to have them display on the Telemetry
screen. Refer to the previous "Sensor" explanation
pages for how to do this.
Various telemetry data
Choose the desired sensor and tap.
Start slot number
Telemetry
Displaying data from the receiver
This screen displays your choice of data from the
receiver.
Also warnings can be activated regarding the data.
For example, if the receiver voltage drops, the user
can be warned by an alarm (and vibration).
Tap the [Telemetry] button in the Linkage menu to
call the setup screen shown below.
Tap page button to
advance to next page.
(The number of pages
changes with the number
of sensor registration.)
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
●Return to Linkage menu
95
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry: Receiver [Battery]
Displaying data from the
receiver battery voltage
In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver is
displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
Receiver battery
voltage
Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
●Return to
Linkage menu
96
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry: Receiver [Ext. battery]
Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
Ext. battery
voltage
Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
Displaying data from the EXT
battery voltage port
The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data from
the EXT-battery output from the R7108SB receiver.
In order to use this function, it is necessary to
connect external voltage connector of the R7108SB
receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V to the
battery you desire to measure the voltage of the
EXT-battery.
You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if the
voltage set by you is exceeded.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
*CA-RVIN-700 must be installed in the aircraft.
●Return to
Linkage menu
97
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Temperature
Sets the temperature
on which the alarm
operates.
An upward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature rises
above the set value.
A downward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature drops
below the set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Tap the [Temperature] button in the Telemetry
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Telemetry : Temperature
Displaying data from the temperature
Temperature is a screen which displays/sets up
the temperature information from an optional
temperature sensor.
The temperature of the model (engine, motor,
battery, etc.) which is ying can be displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
Alert set : Temperature warning
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [
] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑100
↓0
Adjustment range: -20
~200
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
●Return to
Linkage menu
98
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
rpm
Sets the rpm on which
the alarm operates.
An upward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when the
rpm rises above the set
value.
A downward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when the
rpm falls below the set
value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
● Tap the [ rpm sensor] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
Telemetry : RPM Sensor
Displaying data from the rpm
The RPM Sensor screen is used to set up an
optional rpm sensor and display the rotation
information it transmits.
The rotation of the model (engine, motor, etc.)
which is ying can be shown.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
Alarm set : Over
(
Under
)
rotations
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [
xxx
rpm] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑ 2,000 rpm 0 rpm
Adjustment range: 0 rpm~150,000 rpm
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
*An rpm sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
"Magnet"
"Optics"
"Brushless motor"
SBS-01RM →
SBS-01RO
SBS-01RB →
Gear ratio
Blade
Pole
1.00~99.00
2~10
2~30
●Return to
Linkage menu
99
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Altitude
Sets the altitude
on which the alarm
operates.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
altitude reaches above
your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
altitude reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Allows Melody to be
turned ON or OFF.
Tap the [Altitude] button in the Telemetry screen to
call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
Telemetry : Altitude
Displaying data from the altitude
Altitude is a screen which displays / sets up the altitude
information from an optional altitude sensor or GPS sensor.
The altitude of the model which is ying can be known. If it
becomes higher (low) than preset altitude, you can be told by
alarm. Warning by vibration can also be chosen. Data when
a power supply is turned on shall be 0 m, and it displays the
altitude which changed from there. Even if the altitude of an
aireld is high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude dierence
from an airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates the
altitude from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure
will get lower as you go up in altitude. Using this, the
sensor will estimate the altitude. Please understand that an
exact advanced display cannot be performed if atmospheric
pressure changes in a weather situation.
First, the set of a reference is required.
1. The model and transmitter to which the
altitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
also at the same aireld. You should preset before a ight.
Alarm set : Altitude
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx
m
] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑200 m ↓-50 m
Adjustment range -500 m~+3,000 m
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a di󰮏erent melody.
Mode1: Little rise/dive
Melody changes
: sensitively
Mode4: Big rise/dive
Melody changes
: insensible
●Return to
Linkage menu
100
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Variometer
Sets the variometer
on which the alarm
operates.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
variometer reaches
above your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
variometer reaches
below your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Allows Melody to be
turned ON or OFF.
● Tap the [Variometer] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
First, the set of a reference is required.
1. The model and transmitter to which the
altitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
also at the same aireld. You should preset before a ight.
*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
Telemetry : Altitude [Variometer]
Displaying data from the
variometer
VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up the
variometer information from an optional altitude
sensor or GPS sensor.
The variometer of the model which is ying can be
known.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model's
status, the T16IZ incorporates a dierent melody
for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending
upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary to
indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or
descending at a rapid rate.
Alert set : variometer
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [m/s] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: +1m
Adjustment range-50 m/s~+50 m/s
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a di󰮏erent melody.
Mode 1 : Little rise/dive
Melody changes
: sensitively
Mode 4 : Big rise/dive
Melody changes
: insensible
●Return to
Linkage menu
101
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vario Melody Setting
Tap the [Set] button
Next page
Current variometer
This is the changing point of climb and sink. When the variometer
is greater than this value, Vario Melody is climb type. When the
variometer is less than this value, Vario Melody is sink type.
Setting rangeRange ↑ setting value Range ↓ setting value
Initial value0.0 m/s
When the variometer is less
than this value, Vario melody
is not output.
Setting range
0 m/s +50 m/s
Initial value0.0 m/s
When the variometer is
greater than this value, Vario
melody is not output.
Setting range
-50 m/s 0 m/s
Initial value0.0 m/s
When the variometer is less than
this value, Vario melody is not
variable.
Setting range
-50 m/s Offset value
Initial value-5.0 m/s
When the variometer is greater
than this value, Vario melody is
not variable.
Setting range
Offset value +50 m/s
Initial value5.0 m/s
*These settings can be
made for each sensor.
[The relation of Vario Melody settings]
Dead band
(Not sound)
Fixed melody
Fixed melody
Variable melody
Variable melody
Climb side
Discontinuous
sounds
Sink side
Continuous
sounds
Range
Deadband
Deadband
Range
Offset
O󰮏set
Deadband
Range
102
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
The output vario melody does not change during
the delay time. In other words, this is a minimum
time of Vario melody output.
Setting range0.0 s0.5 s1.0 s1.5 s
Initial value0.0 s
*This parameter is effective to all variometers.
Delay
Actually Variometer
0.0m/s
1.0m/s 3.0m/s 4.0m/s -1.0m/s2.0m/s
Output Vario Melody
Delay time
1.0s
0.0m/s 1.0m/s 3.0m/s 4.0m/s -1.0m/s2.0m/s
[Vario Melody Delay]
103
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Telemetry: Voltage [Battery]
Displaying data from the receiver battery voltage
In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver is
displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
Battery voltage
Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
● Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed. In
order to use this function, it is necessary to connect
External voltage connector of R7108SB
SBS-
01V
Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The power
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXT-
VOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3P
lines is displayed here.
*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
Two examples of wiring are shown
*Refer to the manual of SBS-01V for the details of
wiring.
to S.BUS2
port
to S.BUS2
port
R7108SB
R7108SB
Drive battery 1
(EXT Battery)
Receiver battery
Receiver battery
Drive battery 2
(EXT Battery)
Drive battery 1
(EXT Battery)
Drive battery 2
(EXT Battery)
Switch
Power supplies
for servos
Another power
supply Hub
S.BUS2
servos
Two drive batteries are measured (R7108SB use)
Two drive batteries and power supplies for servos are measured (R7108SB use)
●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]
●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]
●The voltage for servos is measured in a power supply line [SBS-01V use]
Normal Line
Normal Line
EXT Line
EXT Line
*SBS-01V measures two voltage. One corresponds to high voltages, such as a drive battery,
with an EXT line. Another is a normal line and is measurement of the battery for receivers of a
line connected to 3P connector, or the battery for servos.
Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer,
Voice, and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using
the vibrator alarm. If using vibrator,
choose one of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲"
"▲▲" buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to
the original state, push the HOME/EXIT
button.
Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.
●Return to
Linkage menu
104
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry: Voltage [Ext. battery]
Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap Limit [4.0 V].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset to
the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
● Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen to
call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
Displaying data from the EXT
battery voltage port
In this screen, the EXT battery voltage is
displayed. In order to use this function, it is
necessary to connect External voltage connector of
R7108SB
SBS-01V
Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The power
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXT-
VOLT.
*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Ext. battery
voltage
●Return to
Linkage menu
105
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry : GPS [Distance]
Displaying data from the Distance Screen
The Distance screen displays and sets altitude data
from an SBS-01/02G GPS Sensor (sold separately),
and allows the distance to the airborne aircraft to
be read by the transmitter. When the aircraft flies
inside or outside the set distance, an alarm and
vibration alerts the pilot.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mount
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
Sets the distance
on which the alarm
operates.
● Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to call
the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Distance
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
above your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
below your set value.
Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference"
item. Sets the current aircraft position
as the starting point.
Surface
Altitude
Slant
Altitude calculated as either straight line distance
(slant) or surface distance on a map can also be
selected.
Select <Slant> <Surface> to "Distance mode", tap the
screen.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
●Return to
Linkage menu
106
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
*Positioning time of GPS
When powered up, the SBS-01/02G begins to
acquire GPS satellite data. This process can
take several minutes. Please do not move the
model during this process. During acquisition,
the LED on the SBS-01/02G will blink green;
after the satellite's signals have been acquired,
the LED will become solid green, and the GPS
signal strength display on the transmitter will
show three bars.
Moving the model before the satellites are fully
acquired will cause a delay in acquiring the
satellite signal.
First, the set of a reference is required.
1. The model and transmitter to which the GPS
sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.
*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.
Setting a "too far" alarm distance
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 1,000 m
Adjustment range 0 m~3,000 m
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset to
the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
Setting a "too close" alarm distance
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,
and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the
vibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose one
of the three types.
3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 0 m
Adjustment range 0 m~3,000 m
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset to
the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the
original state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
Distance
Telemetry
Data
107
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry : GPS [Speed]
Displaying data from the speed
The speed screen displays and sets the speed data from an
SBS-01/02G (GPS sensor) sold separately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be displayed.
After flight, the maximum speed during flight can be
viewed. Because this speed is based on position data from
a GPS satellite, the ground speed is displayed instead of
air speed. Consequently, with a head wind, the displayed
speed decreases and with a tail wind, the displayed speed
increases.
*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
Alarm setting when speed increases
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑200km/h ↓0km/h
Adjustment range 0km/h~500km/h
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the original
state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
*Speed alarm precaution
Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, it
cannot be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft that
stalls at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater
even through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In
addition, with an aircraft that will disintegrate in midight at
400km/h at an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches
30km/h the airplane will disintegrate in midair due to over
speeding even at a ground speed of 370km/h.
Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.
● Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to call
the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Speed
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mount
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.
Reference and Distance mode work in conjunction with Distance
discussed on the previous two pages.
●Return to
Linkage menu
108
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Altitude
Variometer
position
Telemetry : GPS [Altitude, Variometer, Position]
The Altitude, Variometer, Position screen displays
and sets the data from an SBS-01/02G (GPS
sensor) sold separately.
*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
Select [GPS] in the Telemetry screen and
access the setup screen shown below.
Refer to the former
page for a setup
about Altitude and
Variometer.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mount
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Altitude
Variometer
This indicates the
receiving accuracy
from a GPS Satellite.
When three bars are
displayed, the GPS is
ready for use.
The position of the present
model is displayed.
●Return to
Linkage menu
109
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Tap here and go to the
Servo 2 settings page.
(Display and settings
content is the same as
Servo 1.)
When the Alarm or
Vibrator options are
activated, the servo
connection will
display.
*This alarm and display is limited to the S.BUS
servos connected to the servo sensors.
Tapping this will
take you to the
settings screen for
the current alarm
Telemetry : Servo sensor [Current]
The SBS-01S can monitor and display the in-ight
current, operating angle, and internal temperature
of up to two S.BUS2 servos.
If you forget to connect the servo wiring during
fuselage assembly, or the servo was disconnected,
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.
*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Vibrator is choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches above
your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches below
your set value.
Initial value: ↑ 10.0A ↓ 0.0A
Adjustment range 0.0A~10.0A
( Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)
●Return to Linkage menu
Tapping this and selecting
"Buzzer" will cause the device
to sound an alarm when
servos are not connected.
Tapping this and selecting
"Each type" will cause the
device to vibrate when servos
are not connected.
110
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sets the angle on
which the alarm
operates.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.
Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
temperature reaches
above your set value.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
angle reaches above
your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
temperature reaches
below your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
angle reaches below
your set value.
Initial value: ↑ +180.0° ↓ -180.0°
Adjustment range -180.0° ~ +180.0°
( Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)
Telemetry : Servo sensor [Temperature] [Angle]
*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
Sets the temperature
on which the alarm
operates.
Initial value: ↑ 115℃↓ -10℃
Adjustment range -10℃ ~115℃
( Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)
●Return to
Linkage menu
● Temperature
● Angle
111
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Select [Current] in the Telemetry screen and
access the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu
Drive
Battery
SBS-01C
to Receiver
Motor
ESC
*Current sensor must be installed in the
aircraft.
Alarm setting
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
Tapping this will take you to
the settings screen for the
current alarm
Tapping this will take you to
the settings screen for the
voltage alarm
Tapping this will take you to
the settings screen for the
consumption capacity alarm
↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches below
your set value.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
Telemetry : Current sensor [Current]
The SBS-01C has the capability of measuring
current, voltage and capacity (consumption) from
drive battery all at the same time.
The consumption capacity is indicated.
It isn't the present battery capacity.
112
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry : Airspeed sensor [Airspeed]
Displaying data from the airspeed
The speed screen displays and sets the speed
data from an SBS-01TAS (Airspeed sensor) sold
separately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be
displayed. After ight, the maximum speed during
flight can be viewed. Airspeed is the speed of an
aircraft relative to the air. You will be able to get a
more accurate aircraft speed.
*A Airspeed sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
Alarm setting when speed increases
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Adjustment range 0km/h~800km/h
(↑Limit
↓Limit)
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the original
state, push the HOME/EXIT button.
Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.
Tap the [Speed sensor] button in the Telemetry
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Speed
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, and
Inhibit.
Allows Speech to be
turned ON or OFF.
*The Airspeed sensor is necessary, and is sold separately.
Mount and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
functions.
An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.
●Return to
Linkage menu
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
113
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry data log function
Telemetry data has been adapted to the log function which is recorded at the microSD card.
【Setting method】
Open the linkage menu Tele. setting screen.
 
Log recording can be started and stopped by operating a switch. The Logging switch is selected.
The log output interval can be set.
* The data to be recorded is updated at the time set by Linkage menu
System Type screen D/L interval. For
example, when the log output interval is 1 second and the D/L interval is 2 seconds the same data is overlapped and
recorded twice.
【Operation method】
Insert the microSD card into the card slot.
Set the switch set by Log Start/Stop Switch to ON. A beep sounds and a log file is created and recording of the
telemetry data begins.
Absolutely never remove the microSD card while log data is being recorded.
Set the switch set by Logging switch to OFF. A beeping sound is generated and recording of the telemetry data stops.
Turn off the transmitter power and remove the microSD card.
Log file
A log file is created in the microSD card LOG folder. Two files with the same filename, but a different extension are
created. (Example: 00001234.FLI, 00001234.FLD)
Extension FLI: Slot allocation information file
Extension FLD: Log data file
*When copying or moving a log file, always select both the .FLI file and .FLD file.
Log files can be converted to CSV format by using the telemetry log converter available at the Futaba website.
Notes
Altimeter altitude data and GPS distance and altitude data output with the point that time logging started as the
reference (0 m). When the transmitter preset position and the log start position are different, the transmitter display
and the log data display will also be different. The altitude and distance from the take-off position can be recorded by
starting logging immediately after take-off.
The transmitter gear ratio or number of fins setting is not reflected in the speedometer log data (speed). Multiply the
gear ratio or number of fins by the speed data.
When the microSD card becomes full, recording stops and does not resume even if logging is restarted.
Tele. setting
Tap the [Tele.setting] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
Speech interval set , data logging of telemetry.
Set the speech interval of telemetry data, and the
logging of telemetry data to a microSD card at
chosen intervals.
Telemetry data can be checked on your PC after a
ight.
Sets the speech interval
Initial value: 0 sec.
Adjustment range 0-30 sec.
●Return to
Linkage menu
114
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Telemetry Alarm Duration and Repeat time
The repeat time and duration time for the telemetry alarm (buzzer, vibration and speech) can be set.
Duration is not displayed when
Repeat is INH.
Alarm
output
Duration time 5s
Repeat time 8s
OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON
e.g. Repeat time is 8 seconds and Duration time is 5 seconds.
[Duration and Repeat time for Telemetry Alarm]
Tap the [Telemetry Setting] button in the Linkage
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
Duration
It is an alarm output time.
Setting range:1 s ~ 30 s
Initial value:INH
Duration value has to be less than
repeat value.
Duration time is extended when the
other alarm event occurs.
Repeat
It is a repeat time of an alarm
output.
Setting range:INH,1 s ~ 240 s
Initial value:INH
115
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Trainer
Trainer system starting and setting
T16IZ trainer system makes it possible for the
instructor to choose which channels and operation
modes can be used in the student's transmitter.
The function and rate of each channel can be set.
The training method can also be matched to the
student's skill level. Two transmitters must be
connected by an optional Trainer Cord, and the
Instructor's transmitter should be programmed for
trainer operation, as described below.
When the Instructor activates the trainer switch, the
student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/ FUNC/
NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor can make
corrections while the student has control). When
the switch is released the Instructor regains control.
This is very useful if the student gets the aircraft
into an undesirable situation.
● Setting data are stored to model data.
Student rate can be adjusted at MIX/FUNC/
NORM mode.
Activated student channels can be selected
by switches.
Note: This trainer system can be used in the following
manner:
1. With the T16IZ transmitter and a conventional
transmitter, if the channel order is different, it is
necessary to match the channel order before using this
function.
You can select the channel of input data from student's
transmitter in the "FUNC" or "MIX" mode.
2. When the T16IZ is used as the instructors transmitter,
set the modulation mode of the student’s transmitter to
PPM.
If being used as the student, T16IZ can be connected to
the instructor's transmitter which requires the student's
mode to be PPM. T16IZ always sends PPM mode signal
from the trainer jack.
(In the case of student's transmitters other than 2.4 GHz)
3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in both
transmitters before ying.
Correspondingtypesoftransmittersandtrainermodesettings:
Types of transmitters
Instructor's transmitter settings Student's transmitter settings
System Type Trainer setting System Type Trainer setting Trainer Cords
Instructor Student Mod. mode CH mode Mod. mode CH mode Mod. mode
T16IZ,FX-32
T14SG,T16SZ,
T18SZ,T18MZ,
T32MZ
T16IZ,FX-32
T14SG,T16SZ,
T18SZ,T18MZ,
T32MZ
Arbitrary 16CH Arbitrary 16CH -
T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords
T16IZ
T14MZ, FX-40, T12Z,
T12FG,
FX-30
Arbitrary 12CH
PCM-G3
2.4G
12CH PPM
T16IZ T8FG, FX-20 Arbitrary
12CH FASST-MLT2
- -
8CH FASST-MULT
T16IZ
T10C, T9C,
T7C,T6EX, T4EX
Arbitrary 8CH PPM - - T12FG
T16IZ T10CG,T7C Arbitrary 8CH Arbitrary - - T12FG
T16IZ
T10J, T8J, T6K, T6J,
T6L
Arbitrary 8CH Arbitrary - -
T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords
T14MZ, FX-40, T12Z,
T12FG,
FX-30
T16IZ Arbitrary 12CH Arbitrary 12CH -
T8FG, FX-20 T16IZ Arbitrary 12CH Arbitrary 12CH -
T10C, T10CG, T10J,
T9C, T7C
T7C, T8J, T6K
T6J
T16IZ Arbitrary - Arbitrary 8CH -
116
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
When using at the teacher side
1. Select the mode.
*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want to
change and change the mode using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲"
"▲▲" buttons. The display blinks. Tap the screen to change
the mode.
"Teacher/Student": Select [Teacher].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to
[OFF] or [ON].
"16/12/8 CHANNEL": When the student uses
the T16IZ (including the T18MZ, T32MZ, T14SG)
select [16CH]. Otherwise select [12CH]
or[8CH].
2. Select the trainer switch.
*When setting or changing the switch, tap to the "SWITCH"
item, call the switch setup screen and set the desired switch
and ON/OFF direction.
(See "Switch selection method" at the end of this
manual for selection method details.)
*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the
ON position on the switch setup screen. When [Normal] is
selected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed. When
[Alternate] is selected, the trainer function is alternately
turned on and off each time the switch is operated. This
allows alternate ON/OFF switching even when a momentary
switch (SH) is used.
Note: The trainer function won’t be turned
on unless the Instructor's transmitter receives
signals from the student's transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting your
trainer cable.
When using at the student side
1. Select the mode.
*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want to
change and change the mode using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲"
"▲▲" buttons. The display blinks. Tap the screen to change
the mode.
"Teacher/Student": Select [Student].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to
[ACT].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the
T16IZ, T14SG, T18SZ, T16SZ, T18MZ, T32MZ select
[16CH]. When the student uses the T14MZ,
T12Z, T12FG or FX-40, select [12CH]. Otherwise
select [8CH].
Note: In "student mode", only the teacher
side can turn on and off the power to the
student's transmitter. Keep the power switch
always at off position.
● Tap the [Trainer] button in the Linkage menu to call
the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu
117
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
3. Select the operating mode for each channel.
"NORM": The model is controlled by signals
from the student transmitter.
"MIX" mode: The model is controlled by
signals from the teacher and student
transmitters. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)
"FUNC" mode (function mode):
The model is controlled by signals from
the student transmitter with the teacher
AFR setting. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)
"OFF": Only the teacher side operates.
*The setting above allows setting of the servo throw relative
to the amount of student side operation when [MIX] or
[FUNC] was selected.
When changing the rate, use the "▼▼" "▼"
"▲" "▲▲" button to Tap the [Rate] item of
the channel.
Setting range: -100~+100
Initial value: +100
*When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initial value.
4. Set the switch of each channel.
*When setting the switch at each channel, tap to the "SW"
item of the channel you want to change, call the switch
setup screen, and select the switch.
"--" : Always ON.
"SA"~"SH": The switch which enables student
side operation can be selected. (See "Switch
selection method" at the end of this manual
for selection method details.)
Trainer student channel setting
function
In training mode, the instructor's transmitter can
pick up the student's signal on both the "Function"
and "Mix" channels. That makes it easy for the
two transmitters to connect even if the student and
instructor have set up their transmitters dierently.
*When the instructor's transmitter mode is set to "NORM",
the signal of the same channel of the student's transmitter is
output as is. (The same as before.)
Futaba is not responsible for damage
sustained by combination with parts other
than Futaba Genuine equipment.
When connecting Futaba transmitters to
the trainer code, do not operate the power
switch on the student side transmitter and
operate the power switch on the teacher
side transmitter as before. The student side
transmitter turns power automatically in
conjunction with the teacher side.
Trainer connector power supply
specication
Trainer connector to supply power to external
equipment connected to the trainer connector, when
turning on the power by pressing the power switch
in the trainer student mode.
118
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Warning setting
Mixing warning normal reset
The warning display at power ON can be turned
ON/OFF for each function. Use by setting functions
which may be dangerous if operated at power ON
to ON. Initial setting is all ON (Buzzer).
Tap the [Warning setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
The settings can be changed
individually. When set to
[Inhibit], a warning is not
displayed at power ON.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.
●Return to
Linkage menu
WARNING
I
t is extremely dangerous to
unnecessarily inhibit essential
warnings.
Careless spinning of propellers or rotors poses a
danger of serious injury or death.
119
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
T16IZ has a menu for each of the following:
System, Linkage, and Model. Also, you can
create a personalized User menu that can include
all of the menus that you use most often.
How to call a User menu
1. From the home screen, press the U.MENU/MON. button.
*Any change made to data entered from the User menu or
from the normal method of use are the same. Changes made
in either way are saved into the transmitter memory.
User menu setting
Original menu screen making
Tap the [User menu setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
Tap here to select
your rst choice.
Once pressed, 3 pages of choices will be displayed.
Make your selection, press your choice and the
rst of your "User menu" will be entered.
When "---" is chosen,
it can be deleted.
HOME
screen
Press the U.MENU/MON.
From the home
screen
●Return to Linkage menu
Function can be
called by a tap
120
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Data reset
Model memory setting data reset. (by item)
This function is designed to allow you to reset
selected portions or all of the settings saved in
the active model memory. You may individually
choose to reset the following sets of data:
Trim (All condition):
Reset the digital trim setting.
*All the conditions, or the condition currently
being displayed (the entire group for group setting),
can be selected.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
Trim (Current and Group condition):
Reset the digital trim setting.
*Current condition, group condition, can be
selected.
Data resetting method
1. Tap to the item you want to reset and tap
the screen.
*A conrmation message appears.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
Model menu setting:
Resets all the functions in the Model menu except
condition select.
All model setting:
Resets all Linkage and Model menu functions
except for system type, model select, model type,
function name, and telemetry setting.
Function Name:
A function name is reset.
Telemetry:
Reset the telemetry setting.
[Trim (All condition)]: Resets only the Trim (all
conditions)
[Trim(Current and Group condition)]: Resets
only the data of Trim (condition in use and all
the conditions set to group mode)
[Model menu setting]: Resets all the functions
in the model menu, except the condition
selection functions.
[All model setting]: Resets all the functions in
the linkage menu and model menu except
the frequency, model select, and model
type functions.
[Function name]: Resets only the function
name functions.
[Telemetry]: Resets only the teremetry
functions.
2. Execute reset by tapping the "Yes".
Select [Data reset] at the linkage menu and call
the setup screen shown below.
CAUTION
Throttle Reverse
■ Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is
REV (reverse). Thoroughly check the Hi and Low
directions of the engine or motor used and be careful
that they do not suddenly run at full speed. Even
after data reset, CH3 is reversed
.
CAUTION
Never engage the Data reset function
while the engine is starting or the
motor drive wiring is connected.
■ Sudden, abrupt spinning of propellers or rotors is
extremely dangerous.
●Return to Linkage menu
121
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
The dedicated mixes, etc. usable when airplane
or glider model type is selected are displayed
in this Model menu functions section. First use
the Model type function of the Linkage menu to
preset the model type, wing type, and tail type
matched to the fuselage used. Other settings reset
the data used in mixing function, etc.
These dedicated mixes can be set for each
flight condition, as required. When you want to
use the system by switching the settings for each
condition by switch or stick position, use the
Condition select function to add ight conditions.
(Up to 8 conditions can be used)
Note: The T16IZ is designed so that the airplane and
glider model types can handle aircraft of the same
wing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders,
except some dedicated functions, are summarized
without regard to the model type.
The setting items are different, depending on the
number of servos, etc. according to the wing type
used. The setup screens in the instruction manual
are typical examples.
MODEL MENU (Airplane/Glider functions)
Model menu (Airplane/Glider) functions table
Servomonitor
Displays the servo test and operation position
Conditionselect
Flight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition
delay can be set.
AFR
Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.
Dualrate
D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.
Program.mixes
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for
each condition.
Ailerondi󰮏erential
This function adjusts the left and right ailerons. Roll axis correction and fine
tuning with a VR are also possible. This is convenient when making settings
during ight.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
Flapsetting
The aps can be adjusted independently. For a 4 aps model, the camber aps
can be mixed with the brake aps.
[Airplane/glider, 2 aps or more]
AIL →Camberap
This mix operates the camber flaps in the aileron mode. It improves the
operation characteristic of the roll axis.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 2 aps or more]
AIL →Brakeap
This mix operates the brake aps in the aileron mode. It improves the operation
characteristic of the roll axis.
[Airplane/glider, 4 aps or more]
Aileron →Rudder
This mix is used when you want to operate the rudder at aileron operation.
Banking at a shallow bank angle is possible.
[Airplane/glider, general]
Elevator Camber
This mix is used when you want to the mix camber aps with elevator operation.
Lifting force can be increased at elevators up.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
Cambermixing
This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the elevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
Airbrake →ELE
This mix is used to correct operation of the airbrakes (spoilers) when landing.
[Airplane/glider, general]
Camberap ELE
This mix is used to correct for attitude changes when the camber aps are being
used.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 1 ap or more]
Rudder Aileron
This function is used to correct roll knife edge, etc. of stunt planes. [Airplane/glider, general]
Rudder Elevator
This function is used to correct roll maneuvers, knife edge, etc. of stunt planes. [Airplane, general]
Buttery(Crow)
This function is used when powerful brake operation is necessary. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more]
Trimmix1/2
The ailerons, elevators, and flaps trim offset rate can be called by switch or
condition selection.
[Glider general]
Snaproll
This function selects the snap roll switch and adjusts the steering angle of each
rudder. Servo speed can also be adjusted.
[Airplane general]
Airbrake
This function is used when airbrakes are necessary when landing or when diving,
etc. during ight.
[Airplane, general]
Gyro
This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro is used. [Airplane/glider/multicopter, general]
Ailevator
This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons of models with elevator
specications.
[Airplane/glider, elevator specications]
Acceleration
Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden Elevator, Elevator Camber,
and Ail → Rudder.
[Airplane/glider general]
Motor
The operation speed when the motor of F5B and other EP gliders is started by
switch can be set.
[Airplane/glider, general]
V-Tail
This function adjusts the elevators and rudder of V-tail models. [Airplane/glider, V-tail specications]
Winglet
This function adjusts the left and right rudders of winglet models. [Airplane/glider, winglet specications]
122
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Condition select
Flight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,
and condition delay can be set. [All model types]
The functions in the Model menu can be used by
switching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
by using the Condition select function to add ight
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition select
function, this setting is unnecessary. In this case,
use the ight conditions assigned at initial setting.
Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, this
function can be linked with other operations.
A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo
positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels during
condition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at the
switching destination condition, the
related function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
When multiple conditions were set, their
operation priority can be freely changed.
The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easily
conrmed.
Conditions List
Select [Condition select] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name
Condition Addition
1. When the [Add] button is tapped, the
Condition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to the
conditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the end
of this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.
Condition Renaming
1. Select the condition by
tapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the new
name is registered.
123
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Conditions List
Currently selected condition name
ConditionCopy
1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the button
of the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the data
is copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]
button.)
Condition Remove
1. Select the condition by
tapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button is
tapped, the condition is
reset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)
Prioritychange
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with the
priority [ ] or [ ] button. (The
last condition has the highest
priority.)
*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has the
lowest priority.
Last condition has
the highest priority
Conditiondelaysetting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
●Initial value: 0
●Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)
(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at the
back of this manual.)
The ON/OFF switch of
condition is chosen.
124
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AFR
The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]
AFR function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
functions for each ight condition.
This is normally used after End Point has dened
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied from
one channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting the
operation rate through the AFR function.
Operation curve adjustment: Three types
of curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can be
selected. A maximum 17 points curve can be
used for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves from
complex curves to simple curves can be
used.
Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.
Select [AFR] at the model menu and call
the setup screen shown below.
Functionselection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.
When D/R is turned ON, the display will
show "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)
and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.
Operation curve setting
(For a description of the setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
Servo speed setting
(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)
Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)
(For more information, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
●Return to Model menu
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A and
Rate B
Curve select
Separately Combination
(Left and right
symmetrical
curve.)
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve
100%
40%
Rate
Rate
125
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Select [Dual rate] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
Dual rate
D/R curves which can be switched by switch, etc.
can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
Up to 6 rates can be added for each
condition.
D/R is set for each condition and is not
reected at other conditions.
D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.
The ON/OFF switch of
dual rate is chosen.
Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .
When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.
Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions and
switchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.
Rate,EXPsettings
areonAFRfunction
●Return to Model menu
100%
40%
126
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to call
the setup screen shown below.
Program. mixes
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]
Programmable mixing may be used to correct
undesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
be used for unusual control congurations. Mixing
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of the
mixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim added to
the Slave channel response, if you desire ("Trim"
setting). The mixing curve can be changed so
that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
eectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.
Oset-type mixing applies a xed oset or preset
to the programmed channel servo operation and
may control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful link
function, which allows Programmable mixing to be
linked with the special mixing functions, or with
other programmable mixing functions. The link
function can be set up for Master and Slave channel
individually.
Fine tuning trim
setting
The on time (start/stop
time) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of the
jet or scale plane, etc.
Group/single mode
switch (Gr./Sngl)
(For more information,
see the description
at the back of this
manual.)
Mixing/O󰮏set mode
switch
After this function is
activated, the master
and slave function
names (or o󰮏set mixing)
are displayed.
Operation curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back of
this manual.)
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH] .
Trim mode setting ON/OFF.
The ON/OFF switch of
prog. mixes is chosen.
Master function
(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.
Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting
●Return to Model menu
127
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting methods
●Group/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selected
conditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]
mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.
●Mixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to the
Offset mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Oset modes.
●Mixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]
button.
*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]
and [ON/OFF].
●Mixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switching
*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.
1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF by
switch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.
●Master channel setting (except offset type
mixing)
1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the
"Link" button.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and other
simple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button and
then select master channel side control.
●Slave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the
"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
●Trim mode ON/OFF setting
1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]
and [OFF].
*This is eective when the master channel is set by Function.
●Mixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of the
curve type you want to use to display the
selection screen. Then, select the curve you
want to use.
*For a description of the curve setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Fine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item to
call the <Switch> screen and then select the
lever, VR, etc. you want to use.
*For a description of the ne tuning trim setting method, see
the description at the back of this manual.
●Servo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen is
displayed.
*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In and
Speed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate at
starting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.
128
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
Aileron di󰮏erential
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. The differential rate can
also be adjusted according to the flying state by
setting a ne tuning VR.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
Setting method
Tap to the aileron (AIL) 1~4(2) left (or right)
setting item.
Adjust the aileron angles.
When setting the fine tuning VR, tap the "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the ne tuning VR.
● The ne tuning rate can be set by curve.
● Select [Aileron differential] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
(For more information, see
the description at the back
of this manual.)
Currently selected condition name
Fine tuning VR setting
*The graph is operated by setting a VR, etc.
Aileron left/right
adjustment
Fine tuning VR operation curve setting
(For a description of the setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
●Return to Model menu
Aileron differential
Aileron differential
129
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
Flap setting
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 aps or more]
The up/down travel of each flap (camber flaps:
FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted
independently at each servo according to the wing type.
● The operation reference point of each ap can be
offset
The camber aps of a 4-ap model can be mixed
with the brake aps. (Brake FLP to camber FLP)
● An ON/OFF switch can be set.
Setting method
Tap ap (FLP) 1~4 up or down according to
the wing type.
Adjust the travel independently.
To offset the operation reference point of
each ap, tap the corresponding offset item.
Use the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲" button to offset
the reference point.
When using brake FLP to camber FLP mixing,
tap the [INH] item and tap the screen. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen. Then, select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
Camber ap setting Brake ap setting
Select [Flap setting] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the Model
Type.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
(For more information, see
the description at the back
of this manual.)
Currently selected condition name
Brake ap to Camber ap setting
Operation reference
point o󰮏set
Operation reference
point o󰮏set
Up side/Down side
adjustment
Up side/Down side
adjustment
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Mixing
INH ON
Operation is performed via the volume
switches, etc., set for each flap control of the
function.
The operational volume
switch is set up by "Function"
●Return to Model menu
130
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIL
AIL
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
AIL Camber ap
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 ailerons + 2 aps or more
This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick
is manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps
perform aileron operation simultaneously and
the operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
● The aileron left/right mixing rate of each ap servo
can be ne-tuned.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● An ON/OFF switch can be set.
● Linking is possible: Link this mix to other mixes.
Adjustment of each
ap servo
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the the back of this manual.)
● Tap the left or right item of each ap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.
*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,
adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
● A mixing curve can be set. (1/2 page)
(For a description of the mixing curve setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
● To set linking, tap the [Link] item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.
Select [AIL→Camber flap] at the
model menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item
●Return to Model menu
131
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIL
AIL
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
AIL → Brake ap
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 4 aps or more
This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick
is manipulated, the aileron and brake flaps
perform the aileron operation simultaneously
and the operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
● The aileron left and right mixing rates can be
adjusted for each ap servo.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
Setting method
● Tap the INH item.
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap to the [--] item
of the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the at the back of this manual.)
● Tap the left or right button of each ap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.
*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,
adjustments can be made by reversing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
● To set linking, tap the Link item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.
Select [AIL→ Brake flap] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Adjustment of each
ap servo
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item
●Return to Model menu
132
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
RUDDER 2
RUDDER
RUDDER
V-TAIL
RUDDER 2
Winglet
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
at Flying wing
( )
( )
AIL 3
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
Aileron → Rudder
Aileron
Rudder
Aileron
Rudder
[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general
Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The mixing rate can be ne-tuned by setting a VR.
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap to the [--] item
of the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the back of this manual.
When setting a VR, tap to the Fine Tuning
"--" item and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be selected.
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
[Fine tuning VR operation mode]
[LIN.] Mixing rate 0% at center of VR.
When the VR is turned clockwise and
counterclockwise, the mixing rate
increases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0% at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rate
increases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0% at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rate
increases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.
Select [Aileron→ Rudder] at the
model menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning VR setting
Operation mode
Adjustment rate
●Return to Model menu
133
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Elevator
Camber
Elevator
Camber
Elevator
Camber
Elevator Camber
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function is used when you want to mix the
camber aps with elevator operation. When used,
the aps are lowered by up elevator, and lift can
be increased.
Note:Taillesswingelevatorcanbeoperated
whenthismixisactivated.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The mixing rate can be ne-tuned by setting a VR.
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning
"--" item and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be
selected.
● A mixing curve can also be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
Select [Elevator→Camber] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Ailerons and aps rate
adjustment
Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning VR setting
Operation mode
Adjustment rate
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
●Return to Model menu
The value inside the
parentheses shows the
current rudder position.
134
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Ailerons, aps
and elevators rate
adjustment
Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Camber mixing
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation which operates the wing camber
(ailerons, camber flaps, brake flaps) in the
negative and positive directions. The aileron,
flap, and elevator rates can also be adjusted
independently by curve, and attitude changes
caused by camber operation can be corrected.
*Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.
● The up/down side rates of the aileron, ap, and
elevator servos can be adjusted by curve. When
the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,
adjustments can be made by changing the
mixing rate polarity (+ or -).
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function can
be set.
● The speed of the aileron, ap, and elevator servos
can be set. (In side/Out side)
Servo speed setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Select [Camber mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
Condition delay cut
switch
Condition delay setting
●Return to Model menu
135
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap to the [--] item
of the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
When setting a condition delay, tap to the
[Condition delay] item.
Set the delay.
When setting a cut switch, tap [Cut-switch]
and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the switch and set its
ON direction. (Always ON at [--] setting)
(For a description of the condition delay
function, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
(Curve/rate setup screen)
The curve and rate are adjusted by calling
the aileron, flap, and elevator curve/rate
screens.
The rate and curve of each servo can be set
by calling each screen. (For a description of
the curve setting method, see the description
at the back of this manual.)
The servo speed can also be adjusted.
LS
136
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
AIR BRAKE
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2
Airbrake → ELE
[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general
This mix is used when you want to mix the
elevators with airbrake (spoiler) operation. It
raises the elevators to correct for dropping of the
nose during airbrake operation.
*This function does not operate when airbrake is not assigned
at the Function menu in the Linkage menu.
● The Rate 1 side/Rate 2 side mixing rate with the
elevator servos can be adjusted.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The mixing rate can be ne-tuned by setting a VR.
Select [Airbrake→ ELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
Adjustment of
elevator servo
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.
When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning
"--" item and tap the screen to call the
selection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be set.
(For a description of the ne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
●Return to Model menu
137
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Adjustment of
elevator servo
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
Camber ap ELE
Camber flap
ELE
Camber flap
ELE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider,
2 ailerons + 1 ap or more
This mixing is used to correct changes (elevator
direction) generated when the camber aps (speed
aps) are used.
● The elevator servos up side/down side rate can be
adjusted. When the mixing direction is reversed
by the linkage, adjustments can be made by
changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or –).
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The mixing rate can be ne-tuned by setting a VR.
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap to the [--] item
of the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen. Then, select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
● Tap elevator servos. Adjust the mixing rate.
*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,
adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or –).
When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the VR. The VR
operation mode can be selected.
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
Select [Camber flap→ELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
●Return to Model menu
138
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
RUDDER 2
RUDDER
RUDDER
V-TAIL
RUDDER 2
Winglet
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
at Flying wing
( ) ( )
AIL 3
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
Rudder → Aileron
[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general
This function is used when you want to mix the
ailerons with rudder operation. It is used when
rudder is applied during roll maneuvers, knife
edge, etc. of acrobatic planes. It can be used to
bank scale models, large models, etc. like a full
size plane.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
● The mixing rate can be ne-tuned by setting a VR.
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap to the [--] item
of the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen. Then, select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see back of this manual.)
When setting a VR, tap to the Fine tuning
"--" item and tap the screen to call the
selection screen and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the ne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the back of this manual.)
When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON is
displayed.)
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting
Select [Rudder→Aileron] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item
●Return to Model menu
139
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting method
● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
When setting a switch, tap to the [--] item
of the switch and tap the screen to call the
selection screen. Then, select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning
"--" item and tap the screen to call the
selection screen and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the ne tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back of
this manual.)
When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON is
displayed.)
Currently selected condition name
Mixing curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back
of this manual.)
Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item
Rudder Elevator
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
This function is used when you want to mix
elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used
to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder
is applied in roll maneuvers, knife edge, etc. of
acrobatic planes.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● Link can be set: Links this mixing to other mixings.
● The mixing rate can be ne-tuned by setting a VR.
(Fine tuning)
Select [Rudder→Elevator] at the
model menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
140
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Buttery
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function allows powerful brake operation
by simultaneously raising the left and right
ailerons and lowering the flaps (camber flap,
brake ap).
This setting will allow the ailerons to be raised
while the flaps are simultaneously lowered.
Butterfly (crow) produces an extremely efficient
landing configuration by accomplishing the
following:
1. Slow the aircraft’s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.
3. Create more lift toward the center of the
wing allowing it to y at a slower speed.
● Mixing during ight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The buttery operation reference point can be
offset. When the screen is tapped with the offset
item selected when operated to the position to
be changed, the reference point is offset. If the
reference point is offset too much, unexpected
operation may be performed.
● The ailerons and aps operation speed can be
adjusted. (In side/Out side)
● A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function can
also be set.
● The differential rate can be adjusted.
*When servo binding occurs when setting the ailerons and
aps in buttery mixing, use the AFR function to adjust the
rate.
Select [Butterfly] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
When using this
function, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /
Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Condition delay setting
Condition delay cut
switch
To next page
The di󰮏erential rate
can be adjusted.
In speed
Out speed
(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
When offsetting the butterfly operation
reference point, operate to the throttle
stick point you want to change and then
touch the Offset button. The reference
point displays 0%. When [Yes] is touched,
the reference point is changed. Then,
"Initialize elevator curve?" appears,
allowing you to conrm your setting.
*When dierential rate is "-", the calculation method of UP/
DOWN and a direction become reverse.
*When dierential rate is "+", Up rate is decrease and DOWN
rate is increase.
141
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILVATOR
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
(Elevator correction rate setup screen)
Overall adjustment
by Rate A and Rate B
Mixing curve setting
*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.
Elevator rate
adjustment
Select the Mixing Rate
AIL and FLP box. Adjust
the mixing rates.
●Return to Model menu
The o󰮏set position is
indicated by a red dotted
line by an elevator curve.
(To elevator curve setup screen)
Fine tuning
setting
*In case of tailless
wing not display.
142
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
At o󰮏set 20 At o󰮏set 20
At o󰮏set 70 At o󰮏set 70
The direction of buttery motion is reversed. The direction of buttery motion is not reversed.
● Mode A
(Normal)
The butterfly operation direction is reversed
at the neutral position (50) of the throttle
stick.
Throttle stick full stroke MODE
● Mode B
(Throttle stick full stroke MODE)
It does not reverse at the neutral position,
so you can set the butterfly operation start
point with the full stroke of the throttle stick.
143
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Trim mix 1/2
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, general
These functions call the ailerons, elevators, and
aps (camber aps, brake aps) trim oset rates
preset according to the ight state.
The amount of ailerons, elevator, and flaps
(camber ap, brake ap) trim oset can be set to a
switch.
As an example Trimmix1 can be set up for
launching, with speed aps and ailerons dropped,
and a slight amount of up elevator. Trimmix
2 can be used for high speed flying, with both
ailerons and speed aps reexed slightly, and a bit
of down elevator.
The trim functions can be activated during
ight by setting a switch. To prevent sudden trim
changes when switching ight conditions, a delay
can be set to provide a smooth transition between
the two. Trim mix 2 will have priority over Trim
mix 1.
The o󰮏set rate of ailerons, aps and elevators can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding setting item. Adjust the rate.
Example
1. Move to the [INH] item
.
Set the trim mix function to
[ON].
*When separating the settings for each condition, move to
the [Group] item and set it to [Single].
2. Select the ON/OFF switch.
3. Select the [Manual] or [Auto] mode.
In the [Auto] mode, also select an auto SW. This
switch can be linked to a stick, etc.
<Speed>
In: The operation speed at switch ON can be set.
Out: The return speed at switch OFF can be set.
<Fine Tuning>
The offset rate can be varied in the Fine Tuning
numeric range set at screen by VR, etc. selection.
<Condition Delay>
When ight conditions are set, the operation speed
can be set for each condition. Condition delay
operation can be interrupted and each rudder
quickly returned to its original position by selecting a
cut switch.
Select [Trim mix1 or 2] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
When using this
function, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches the
function ON/OFF by
switch
Auto: Trim mix function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,
etc. separate from the
function ON/OFF switch
is set.
Condition delay setting
Condition delay cut
switch
In speed
Out speed
(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
When a ne tuning VR
is set, the trim rates
of ailerons, aps and
elevators can be adjusted.
To next page
●Return to Model menu
The value inside the
parentheses shows the
current rudder position.
144
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Snap roll
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
This function selects the switch and rate adjustment
of each rudder, (ailerons, elevators, or aps) when
a snap roll is performed.
● Four snap roll directions can be set. (Right/up,
right/down, left/up, left/down)
● Operation mode: When [Master] mode is selected,
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by master
switch in the state in which the direction switch
was switched to the direction in which you want
to snap roll. When [Single] mode is selected, snap
roll in each direction can be executed by means
of independent switches.
● A safety switch can be set. As a safety measure,
the switch can be set so that snap roll is not
executed when, for instance, the landing
gear is lowered, even if the switch is turned on
accidentally. The snap roll switch is activated only
when the safety switch is ON.
● The operation speed of the aileron, elevator, and
ap servos can be adjusted for each snap roll
direction. (In side/out side)
(Example)SettingexampleforF3A
● Mode: [Master]
● Safety SW: [SW-G] (Safety measure)
Master SW: [SW-H] (Main switch for
executing snap roll)
● Direction switches:
*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left and
right direction switches are selected here.
Right/Up: [SW-D] OFF-OFF-ON
Right/Down: [SW-D] ON-OFF-OFF
Left/Up: [SW-A] OFF-OFF-ON
Left/Down: [SW-A] ON-OFF-OFF
● Speed adjustment
The operation speed of each control
surface when the snap switch is ON can
be changed and snap roll executed by
stick while there is switch operation can be
performed.
Select [Snap roll] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown
below.
To next page
Master or Single is
chosen
Snap roll
directions
The ON/OFF switch
of snap roll is chosen.
The safety switch is
chosen.
Master mode : Direction
switches
Single mode : Snap roll
switches
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)
Aileron, elevator and
Rudder rate adjustment
In speed
Out speed
(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)
●Return to Model menu
145
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
When using this
function, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
The ON/OFF switch of
air brake is chosen.
The value inside the
parentheses shows the
current rudder position.
Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches the
function ON/OFF by
switch
Auto: Air brake function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,
etc. separate from the
function ON/OFF switch
is set.
Offset:The offset
rate of ailerons, flaps,
and elevators can be
adjusted. Tap to the
corresponding setting
item. Adjust the rate.
Fine tuning:When a ne
tuning VR is set on the
next page, the ailerons',
aps', and elevators' trim
rates can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding
setting item. Adjust the
rate.
Condition delay
setting and cut switch
setting.
Fine tuning setting
Aileron 1
Aileron 2
Elevator
Air brake
This function is used when an air brake is
necessary when landing or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap,
brake flap) offset amount can be activated by a
switch.
The oset amount of the aileron, elevator, and
flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
speed of the aileron, elevator, and ap servos can
be adjusted. (In side/Out side) A delay can be set
for each condition, and a Cut switch which will
turn OFF the delay can be chosen. Trim amounts
can be fine-tuned by setting a VR. You can also
set the Auto Mode, which will link Airbrake to a
stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or
dial can also be set as the ON/OFF switch.
Select [Air brake] at the model menu and call the
setup screen shown below.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
In speed
Out speed
(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)
To next page
●Return to Model menu
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
146
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Gyro
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider/multicopter, general
This function is used when a GYA Series gyro
is used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/GY
mode) can be switched with a switch.
● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be
switched.
● Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3) can be
simultaneously controlled.
*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use the
Function menu of the Linkage menu to assign the sensitivity
channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) used to a vacant channel
beforehand.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than Function to [--].
● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be used.
Tap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
● When using this function, Tap [INH].
When a Futaba GYA gyro is used, when [GY] type is selected, the
sensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
● When setting a switch, tap the Switch item and tap the "--" button to call
the selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)
Select [Gyro] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) and
sensitivity of the 3
axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.
3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment
Condition group/
single mode selection
(Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the three
rates (sensitivity) and switching between Normal
and AVCS is possible.
●Return to Model menu
147
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Example)SettingthreeaxisusingaGYA450andGYA451(2)
● Wing type: Aileron 2 servos mounted fuselage selected
Set
5CH Gyro
(GYA451AIL),
7CH Gyro2
(GYA451ELE),
8CH Gyro3
(GYA450RUD),
Control and Trim "--"
: at
the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
● Gyro setting of the Model menu.
*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E
and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since switch E is
turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].
Rudder servo
Elevator servo
Aileron servo
S.BUS2 port
S.BUS Receiver
GYA451
GYA451
GYA450
GAIN 0%
AVCS
NORMAL
When AVCS is used we
recommend that the
sensitivity CH be set to
the 3-position.
Rate ACT Type Switch Gyro Gyro Gyro
1 OFF/ON GY SE AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60%
2 INH
3 ON/OFF GY SE Normal : 60% Normal : 60% Normal : 60%
148
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
(AILERON 5)
(AILERON 6)
Ailevator
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type
Ailevator
(Eective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)
This function improves the operating performance
of the roll axis by operating the elevators as
ailerons.
Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard
(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, like
ailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side
moving up and down together, each side moves in
opposite directions when moving as an ailevator.
On a V-tail, this is also known as a ruddervator,
as they can serve the same purpose. Typically,
both ailevator and ailerons are coupled together to
maximize roll performance, especially on larger
wingspan planes.
Note: Select ailevator as the Model type at the
Model type screen. This changes the output
channel. Check the Function menu.
Select [Ailevator] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
● Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,
adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specied, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out
of travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
(Aileron function)
When the elevators are used as
ailerons, aileron travel of the left and
right elevators can be adjusted.
(Elevator function)
The up and down rates of the left and
right elevators when the elevator stick is
manipulated can be individually adjusted.
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)
●Return to Model menu
149
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider general
Acceleration
Setting method
Acceleration rate setting (Rate)
The return time after operation (Damping)
can be set.
The operation point at acceleration
and deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.
Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Acceleration setting can be performed at Elevator,
Elevator Camber and Aileron Rudder. (Glider
only)
● This setting is divided into elevator setting and camber
setting. The setting method is the same.
● Camber setting sets the acceleration function for Ele
to camber mixing. Setting is not performed when Ele to
camber mixing is INH.
● The acceleration function can be set for both the up
side and down side.
● Function ON/OFF switch setting is performed for
Aileron→ Rudder setting only.
● Aileron→ Rudder setting is acceleration
function setting for Aileron→ Rudder mixing. It is not
performed when Aileron→ Rudder mixing is INH.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the servo stroke is large, make your
settings so there is no binding of your linkage.
Operation up to this
range will initiate
acceleration.
Act position
The rate the angle
increases.
To next page
2/3 : Elevator Camber
3/3 : Aileron Rudder
The return time after operation (Damping)
can be set.
(First return)1 100(Slow return)
(Acceleration doesn't function as 0.)
When using this
function, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
Condition group/
single mode selection
(Gr. /Sngl)
Current position
●Return to Model menu
150
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Motor
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
This function lets you set the operation speed when
the motor of an F5B or other EP glider is started by
switch. The operation speed can be set in 2 ranges
of slow speed ight and high speed ight (Speed 1/
Speed 2). This function can also be operated as a
safety function by setting 2 switches.
● The in side and out side operating speeds can be
adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed 1/
Speed 2).
● The boundary between the 2 ranges can be set.
(From speed 1 to speed 2)
● The set operation speed operation can be
activated at initial operation only. (1 time
operation) However, operation can be repeated
by setting the switch to OFF before operation is
nished. When you want to reset 1 time operation,
set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and then reset it to
[ON].
● The motor (CH3) is controlled by SW-G. (Initial
setting) When changing the switch or stick which
controls the motor, rst change Function of the
Linkage menu.
Note: When using this function, always check initial
operation with the propeller removed.
● When using this function, Tap [INH].
● When you want to set the "One time mode",
tap to the [One time] item and tap the
screen.
● Speed 1 to 2
The speed 1 and speed 2 region boundary
can be changed,
● Operation speed adjustment
The speed when speed 1 and speed 2 are
ON (In) and OFF (Out) can be adjusted.
● When using this function, Tap [INH].
● Group/single mode switching
(For more information, see the description
at the back of this manual.)
● Switch
A switch that turns the function itself
ON/OFF can be selected.
● Motor off position
Tap the motor off button when [SW-G] is in
the motor OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.
The screen graph display OFF direction also
changes.
Notes
● First decide the motor OFF direction, and then
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
● We recommend that motor OFF be set in
combination with F/S.
● Set the basic operation direction with the reverse
function to match the ESC used.
● Always set the motor OFF position.
Select [Motor] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
151
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELEVATOR
(RUDDER 2)
RUDDER
(ELEVATOR 2)
V-Tail
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type V-tail
This function lets you adjust for left and right rudder
angle changes at elevator and rudder operation of a
V-tail airplane.
V-tail is when 2 servos are used together to control
rudder movement as elevators. In addition to each
rudder side moving up and down together, each side
moves in opposite directions when moving as elevators.
On a V-tail, this is also known as a ruddervator, as they
can serve the same purpose.
(Rudder function)
Left and right travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 rudder operation
(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 elevator operation
● Select [V-Tail] at the model menu and call
the setup screen shown below.
● Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,
adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specied, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out
of travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)
●Return to Model menu
152
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
( )
RUDDER 2
Winglet
at Flying wing
( )
Winglet
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, winglet(2RUD)
This function adjusts the left and right rudder
angles of airplanes with winglets.
It can be used for special airplanes with two
rudders. The amount of movement of the two
mounted rudder servos can be adjusted separately.
Two servos are operated with one rudder stick.
(Rudder 1/2)
The travel at rudder stick left and right
operation can be individually set.
● Select [Winglet] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
● Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,
adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)
●Return to Model menu
153
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
This section contains information on the commands
that apply to helicopters only. For instructions
on airplane, glider and multicopter, refer to the
sections pertaining to those aircraft.
Use the Model type function in the Linkage menu
to select the swash type matched to the fuselage
beforehand.
Also, add ight conditions at the Condition Select
screen if necessary before setting the model data at
each function. (Up to 8 conditions can be used)
The AFR function, dual rate function and other
functions common to all model types, are described
in a separate section.
Condition hold
When performing adjustments, such as idling up, when the engine is
engaged, keep the throttle stable so as to prevent the engine from revving
too high. Once your adjustments are complete, always make sure to set
the function to [OFF].
*Condition hold ON/OFF operation is possible under normal conditions
and the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd into the slow throttle range.
Throttle servos will remain at the throttle stick position during ON
operation.
ON/OFF operation on the Home screen
Under the conditions described above, tap the Condition hold [OFF]
displayed on the screen.
During function operation, Condition hold will display [ON] and an
alarm will sound.
WARNING
For safety reasons, when performing individual
adjustments it is recommended that you shut off
the engine and disconnect the motor to prevent
rotation.
*Sudden, abrupt rotation can result in death or serious injury.
MODEL MENU
(
Helicopter
functions)
Model menu (Helicopter) functions table
Servomonitor
Displays the servo test and operation position
Conditionselect
Flight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.
AFR
Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.
Dualrate
D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.
Program.mixes
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for each condition.
Pitchcurve
Pitch curve and hovering trim adjustment
Throttlecurve
Throttle curve and hovering trim adjustment
Acceleration
Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden throttle and pitch commands
Throttlehold
Moves the throttle to idle during autorotation
Swashmixing
Compensates for each control response
Throttlemixing
Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied
Pitch Needle
Adjusts response curve in di󰮏erent ight conditions
Pitch Rudder
Handles torque changes from pitch angle inputs
Gyro
Used to switch gyro sensitivity
Governor
Used to switch RPM of the helicopter’s head
Gyrosetting
Detailed setting of CGY755/CGY760R
154
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Condition select
Flight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,
and condition delay can be set. [All model types]
The functions in the Model menu can be used by
switching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
by using the Condition select function to add ight
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition select
function, this setting is unnecessary. In this case,
use the ight conditions assigned at initial setting.
Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, this
function can be linked with other operations.
A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo
positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels during
condition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at the
switching destination condition, the
related function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
When multiple conditions were set, their
operation priority can be freely changed.
The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easily
conrmed.
Conditions List
Select [Condition select] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name
Condition Addition
1. When the [Add] button is tapped, the
Condition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to the
conditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the end
of this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.
Condition Renaming
1. Select the condition by
tapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the new
name is registered.
155
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Conditions List
Currently selected condition name
ConditionCopy
1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the button
of the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the data
is copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]
button.)
Condition Remove
1. Select the condition by
tapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button is
tapped, the condition is
reset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)
Prioritychange
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with the
priority [ ] or [ ] button. (The
last condition has the highest
priority.)
*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has the
lowest priority.
Last condition has
the highest priority
Conditiondelaysetting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
●Initial value: 0
●Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)
(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at the
back of this manual.)
The ON/OFF switch of
condition is chosen.
156
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AFR
The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]
AFR function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
functions for each ight condition.
This is normally used after End Point has dened
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied from
one channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting the
operation rate through the AFR function.
Operation curve adjustment: Three types
of curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can be
selected. A maximum 17 points curve can be
used for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves from
complex curves to simple curves can be
used.
Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.
Select [AFR] at the model menu and call
the setup screen shown below.
Functionselection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.
When D/R is turned ON, the display will
show "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)
and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.
Operation curve setting
(For a description of the setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
Servo speed setting
(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)
Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)
(For more information, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
●Return to Model menu
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A and
Rate B
Curve select
Separately Combination
(Left and right
symmetrical
curve.)
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve
157
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Select [Dual rate] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
Dual rate
D/R curves which can be switched by switch, etc.
can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
Up to 6 rates can be added for each
condition.
D/R is set for each condition and is not
reected at other conditions.
D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.
The ON/OFF switch of
dual rate is chosen.
Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .
When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.
Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions and
switchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.
Rate,EXPsettings
areonAFRfunction
●Return to Model menu
158
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to call
the setup screen shown below.
Program. mixes
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]
Programmable mixing may be used to correct
undesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
be used for unusual control congurations. Mixing
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of the
mixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim added to
the Slave channel response, if you desire ("Trim"
setting). The mixing curve can be changed so
that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
eectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.
Oset-type mixing applies a xed oset or preset
to the programmed channel servo operation and
may control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful link
function, which allows Programmable mixing to be
linked with the special mixing functions, or with
other programmable mixing functions. The link
function can be set up for Master and Slave channel
individually.
Fine tuning trim
setting
The on time (start/stop
time) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of the
jet or scale plane, etc.
Group/single mode
switch (Gr./Sngl)
(For more information,
see the description
at the back of this
manual.)
Mixing/O󰮏set mode
switch
After this function is
activated, the master
and slave function
names (or o󰮏set mixing)
are displayed.
Operation curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back of
this manual.)
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH] .
Trim mode setting ON/OFF.
The ON/OFF switch of
prog. mixes is chosen.
Master function
(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.
Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting
●Return to Model menu
159
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting methods
●Group/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selected
conditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]
mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.
●Mixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to the
Offset mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Oset modes.
●Mixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]
button.
*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]
and [ON/OFF].
●Mixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switching
*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.
1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF by
switch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.
●Master channel setting (except offset type
mixing)
1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the
"Link" button.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and other
simple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button and
then select master channel side control.
●Slave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the
"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
●Trim mode ON/OFF setting
1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]
and [OFF].
*This is eective when the master channel is set by Function.
●Mixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of the
curve type you want to use to display the
selection screen. Then, select the curve you
want to use.
*For a description of the curve setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Fine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item to
call the <Switch> screen and then select the
lever, VR, etc. you want to use.
*For a description of the ne tuning trim setting method, see
the description at the back of this manual.
●Servo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen is
displayed.
*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In and
Speed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate at
starting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.
160
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pitch curve / Pitch trim
Pitch curve
This function adjusts the pitch operation curve for
each flight condition for the optimal flight state
relative to movement of the throttle stick.
*Up to 17 points can be set for the point curve types.
However, when using the 3 points or 5 points specied to
create a curve, a simple curve can be created by reducing
the number of input points to 3 or 5, and then entering the
specied value at the corresponding points that you created
a curve.
Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are su󰮐cient.
Normalcurveadjustment
For normal curve, usually use [Point] type
and create a basic pitch curve centered
about hovering. Use this function together
with the THR curve (normal) function and
adjust the curve so that up/down control is
best at a constant engine speed.
Idleupcurveadjustment
For the high side pitch curve, set the
maximum pitch which does overload the
engine. For the low side pitch curve, create
curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, and
other purposes and use the idle up curves
according to the performance.
Throttleholdcurveadjustment
The throttle hold curve is used when
executing auto rotation dives.
Operation precautions
WARNING
When actually starting the engine and
ying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling state.
Select [Pitch curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
● Mixing curve setting
*For a description of the
curve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.
Currently selected condition name
●Return to Model menu
161
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve Hold Curve
●Pitch Curve (Example)
Group/Single item: When you also want to
input the same setting contents at other
conditions, perform setting in the group
mode. In this case, the same contents are
input to the other conditions set in the group
mode. When you want to set each condition
independently, select the single mode
(initial setting). Other conditions can be set
independently.
Setting method
The screens shown below are curves created by
entering the pitch rate at low, center, and high side (3
points or 5 points) at each condition. When actually
creating a curve, input the rate specified at the
fuselage (or the reference value).
*For a description of the curve setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Curve setting examples
Pitch servo speed setting
(For a description of the setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
162
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pitch trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch)
The hovering pitch, low pitch, and high pitch trim setup screen can be called from the Pitch curve setup
screen.
Hovering pitch trim
setting
Low/high pitch trim
setting
Hovering pitch trim
The Hovering Pitch trim function trims the pitch
near the hovering point. Normally, it is used with
the hovering condition. The hovering pitch can be
ne tuned for changes in rotor speed accompanying
changes in temperature, humidity, and other ight
conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so that
rotor speed is constant. This function can be used
together with the hovering Throttle Trim function
for more delicate operation.
Setting method
When using only the hovering (normal)
condition, switch the group mode to the
single mode (initial setting) before setting.
● Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)
● Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: LD
The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation
(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
● Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.
The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be changed.
High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim
High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim is the pitch servo high
side and low side trim function.
Setting method
When setting the adjustment knobs common
to all the conditions, set them in the group
mode.
● Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)
● Select the adjustment knobs.
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (low
side)
The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be changed.
Trim acts as high side or low side trim with the
center as the standard.
●Return to Model menu
163
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Throttle curve / Throttle Hover trim
Throttle curve
This function adjusts the throttle operation curve
for each condition for optimum engine speed to
throttle stick movement.
Up to 17 curve points can be set for the point
curve type. However, when the 5 points and other
point data is used, a simple curve can be easily
created by reducing the number of input points of
the curve to 5 and entering the specified value at
the corresponding points.
Normal curve adjustment
● Normal curve creates a basic curve
centered around hovering. Use it along
with the normal pitch curve and adjust so
that up/down control at a constant engine
speed is easiest.
Idle up curve adjustment
● Set an idle up curve that maintains a
constant speed at all times, even during
operation which reduces the pitch
performed in ight. Create a curve matched
to loop, roll, 3D, or other purposes and the
idle up curve according to the performance.
Operation precautions
WARNING
When actually starting the engine and
ying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling mode.
Setting method
Group/single item: When you want to
simultaneously enter the same settings to
other functions, make the settings in the
group mode. In this case, the same setting
contents are entered to the all conditions.
When you want to set each condition
independently, make the settings after
selecting the single mode (Initial setting).
Select [Throttle curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are su󰮐cient.
● Mixing curve setting
*For a description of the
curve setting method,
see the back of this
manual.
Currently selected condition name
Throttle hover trim
operating position
(White line)
●Return to Model menu
164
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve
●Throttle Curve (Example)
The curves shown below are created by using the
point curve type and inputting the data of the 5
points 0% (low side), 25%, 50% (center), 75%,
100% (high) side at each condition. They are
created by reducing the number of points on the
line to 5. When actually creating a curve, enter
the data specied per the aircraft (or the reference
value).
*For a description of the curve creation method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Curve setting examples
Throttle Hover trim
The Throttle Hover trim setup screen can be called from the Throttle curve setup screen.
The Throttle Hover function trims the throttle near
the hovering point. Normally, use it with hovering
conditions. Changes in rotor speed accompanying
changes in the temperature, humidity, and other
ight conditions can be trimmed. Adjust the throttle
so that rotor rotation is most stable. More delicate
trimming is also possible by using this function
along with the Hover Pitch function.
Setting method
When using the hovering (normal) condition
only, switch the group mode to the single
mode (initial setting) and make the settings.
Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)
Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: RD
The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation
(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When the value is made small, trim acts only
near the center.
The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be set.
Throttle servo speed setting
(For a description of the setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
●Return to Model menu
165
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
This function is used to adjust the pitch and
the throttle rise characteristic at acceleration/
deceleration operation. An acceleration function
which temporarily increases the pitch and throttle
operations at throttle stick acceleration/deceleration
operation can be set.
Exampleofaccelerationfunctionuse
●When used at pitch, the acceleration
function is effective when you want to
quicken the response of the fuselage at 3D
ight ip, etc.
When used, high pitch temporarily exceeds
maximum pitch, but immediately returns to
maximum pitch.
Setting method
Acceleration can be set at both setting
at acceleration (high) and setting at
deceleration (low).
(The operation point is displayed on a
graph.)
Acceleration rate setting (Rate)
The return time after operation (Damping)
can be set.
Acceleration
Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Operation up to this
range will initiate
acceleration.
Act position
The rate the angle
increases.
To next page
1/2 : Pitch
2/2 : Throttle
The return time after operation (Damping)
can be set.
(First return)1 100(Slow return)
(Acceleration doesn't function as 0.)
When using this
function, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)
Condition group/
single mode selection
(Gr. /Sngl)
Current position
The operation point at acceleration
and deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the pitch stroke is large, make your
settings so there is no binding of your linkage.
●Return to Model menu
166
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Throttle hold
This function sets the throttle cut position for
autorotation. The throttle position can also be set to
an idling position. Setting of these 2 positions can
be selected by switch. This allows use for switching
during training.
Exampleofuse
Since throttle hold has 2 modes (Cut) and
(Idle), using it in the Idling mode during
training and in the Cut mode when
stopping the engine at contest, etc. is
convenient.
Note: When throttle hold is set to ON in the normal
condition, throttle hold acts and the throttle servo
is deactivated. Always set throttle hold to ON in the
hold condition.
Setting method
Operation mode selection
Manual mode(Manual): The throttle hold
function is operated by switch operation
only.
Auto mode(Auto): The throttle hold function
operation is linked to the throttle stick
position.
Auto position setting: When the auto mode is
selected, the throttle position (auto position)
can be selected. Move the throttle stick to
the position you want to set and tap the
screen. (Auto position is displayed.)
Hold position adjustment
Throttle Hold (Cut) sets the throttle cut
position. Adjust it so that the carburetor is fully
closed.
Throttle Hold (Idle): Make this adjustment to
maintain idling for training. Adjustments can
be made based on the throttle curve idle
position.
The throttle servo operating speed can be
adjusted. (Speed)
Throttle cut or training function can be
switched by hold function selector switch.
Operation precautions
WARNING
When starting the engine, conrm that
the idle up condition and throttle hold
condition are OFF.
Select [Throttle hold] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Current position
Hold position
Engine cut setting Engine idle setting
Set to the engine
stop position.
Set to the idling
position.
●Return to Model menu
167
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Swash mixing
The swash mix function is used to correct the swash
plate in the aileron (roll) direction and elevator
(cyclic pitch) corresponding to each operation of
each condition.
Adjustment by independent curve for aileron,
elevator, and pitch operations is possible. The
operation can be smoothly adjusted by calling up
the “Curve setup” screen by tapping the mixing
item that corresponds to the mixing and direction
which needs correction.
Exampleofuse
● As an example, use swash mixing to correct
undesirable tendencies in the roll direction.
For a condition which uses Aileron to
Elevator, set this function to ON. When
raising the nose at a right roll, when the
Rate B side is input and the right aileron is
operated, the elevator moves to the down
side. Tune by adjusting the Rate. For right
roll, adjust to the rate A side.
Setting method
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON is
displayed.)
When you want to set the same contents at
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
The correction rate can be set by curve.
A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call the
selection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.
Select [Swash mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
● Mixing curve setting
*For a description of the
curve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /
Sngl)
●Return to Model menu
168
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Mixing curve setting
*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.
Throttle mixing
This function corrects slowing of engine speed
caused by swash plate operation during aileron
or elevator operation. The method of applying
clockwise or counterclockwise torque when
pirouetting can also be corrected.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the throttle side correction rate relative to
rapid stick operation can also be set.
Setting example
Aileron to Throttle applies a load to the
engine and corrects slowing of the
engine speed when the aileron stick was
operated. Engine racing can be adjusted
independently at the right aileron and left
aileron by Rates A and B.
Setting method
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON is
displayed.)
When you want to set the same contents at
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
● The correction rate can be set by curve.
● A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call the
selection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.
When correction is necessary, tap to the mixing
item corresponding to the mixing that needs
correction and tap the screen to call the curve setup
screen, and then correct the slowing.
<Accelerationfunctionsetting>
Acceleration can be set for both settings
(Left) and (Right)
● Acceleration rate setting (Rate)
The return time (Damping) after operation
can be set.
● The operation point (Act position) when the
correction rate is increased and decreased
can be set independently. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration
operation is performed.
Select [Throttle mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
"Linear" : Correction
applied for the entire
throttle range.
"CTRM" : The correction
rate maximum when
the throttle stick is
centered.
●Return to Model menu
169
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pitch Needle
This mixing is used when the engine is equipped
with needle control or other fuel-air mixture
adjustment. A needle curve can be set.
An acceleration function which temporarily
Setting method
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON is
displayed.)
When you want to set the same contents at
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
A needle curve can be set.
A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap
to the [--] item. Tap the screen to call the
selection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.
<Accelerationfunctionsetting>
●Acceleration can be set at both
acceleration (high) and deceleration (low).
●The acceleration rate (rate) and the return
time after operation (damping) can be set.
●An operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set.
When an operation point was exceeded,
acceleration operation is performed.
Select [Pitch→Needle] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
increases needle operation at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set.
The rise characteristic of the needle servo at
acceleration and deceleration operation can be
adjusted.
● Mixing curve setting
*For a description of the
curve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.
Normally, use [Point] type.
●Return to Model menu
170
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pitch Rudder (Revolution mixing)
Use this mix when you want to suppress the
reaction torque generated by main rotor pitch and
speed changes during pitch operation. Adjust so
that the nose does not move in the rudder direction.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the correction rate at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set. The
mixing rate at acceleration/deceleration can be set.
Setting method
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON is
displayed.)
When you want to set the same contents at
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
● A mixing curve is set.
<Normalconditionmixingcurve>
The mixing curve rate starts from a small
value.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction (polarity), when pitch was
operated at the plus side, set so that
mixing is in the clockwise direction. First,
trim at hovering and then adjust the
neutral position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
from hovering at a constant rate matched
to your own rhythm, and adjust the pitch
so the nose does not deflect when the
throttle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving from
hovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that the
nose does not deflect when the throttle is
raised and lowered.
However, when a GY Series or other heading hold
gyro is used, since correction is performed by the
gyro, this mix is not used. If this function is used
when the gyro operation mode is the AVCS mode,
the neutral position will change.
<Idleupconditionmixingcurve>
Set the mixing rate so that the rudder
direction at high-speed flight is straight
ahead. Adjust for each condition used.
<Accelerationfunctionsetting>
● Acceleration operation can be performed
for both setting at acceleration (High)
and setting at deceleration (Low).
● Acceleration rate setting (Rate)
The return time after operation (Damping)
can be set.
An operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set
independently. When an operation point
was exceeded, acceleration operation is
performed.
●Select [Pitch→Rudder]
at the model menu
and call the setup
screen shown.
● Mixing curve setting
*For a description of the
curve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.
Normally, use [Point] type.
171
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Gyro [Helicopter]
Use this when you want
to adjust sensitivity via
VR, etc., and not on-
screen data entry. Tap "--
", select "VR", etc., and
then tap the value to
adjust. (Won't operate
when value is "0".)
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) and
sensitivity of the 3
axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.
Tapping these will
pull up the detailed
selection screen for
each.
Rate1 Gyro type and
gain
Rate2 Gyro type and
gain
Rate3 Gyro type and
gain
The ON/OFF switch
of gyro is chosen.
When using Rate2/Rate3, make it
INH ON or OFF.
Gyro(RUD)
setting
Gyro2(AIL)
setting
Gyro3(ELE)
setting
3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment
Condition group/
single mode selection
(Gr. /Sngl)
This function is used to adjust gyro sensitivity. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be set for each condition.
The gyro sensitivity can be switched with each
condition or the switch. (3 sensitivities)
*Compatible with 3 axis gyro (CGY750).
Setting method
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON is
displayed.)
When you want to set the same contents at
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
Three rates can be switched for each
condition. (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3)
A ne tuning VR can be set.
Select [Gyro] at the
model menu and call
the setup screen.
Note: [Gyro] [Gyro2] [Gyro3] Default function
[Gyro]: CH6(FASSTest12CH) CH5(Other system type)
[Gyro2] : CH9
[Gyro3] : CH10
Always set to [--] both (control) and (trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.
●Return to Model menu
172
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
* Gyro gain channel
Gyro : CH5
For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch. The gyro sensitivity adjustment connector connects to 6ch.
* Gyro gain channel
Gyro RUD : CH5 For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch.
Gyro2 AIL : CH9
Gyro3 ELE : CH10  For the CGY750, simply connect the S.BUS; functions do not need to be set.
(For the FASSTest12CH, change Gyron/RUD to 6ch.)
Usage example #1: Using gyro for only the rudder and adjusting sensitivity for each condition
Usage example #2: Using 3-axis gyro CGY750 and adjusting sensitivity for each condition
Because sensitivity changes for
hovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition and
adjust sensitivity.
Because sensitivity changes for
hovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition and
adjust sensitivity.
Because the
sensitivity is switched
(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.
Because the
sensitivity is switched
(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.
Tapping here will let
you select either Normal
or AVCS for each of the
three axes.
This is all that is needed
for use in this case.
This is all that is needed
for use in this case.
Tapping here will let you
select either Normal or
AVCS.
Set gain of a rudder
Set gain of a rudder
Set gain of an aileron
Set gain of an elevator
Select [Gyro] at the
model menu and call
the setup screen.
Select [Gyro] at the
model menu and call
the setup screen.
173
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Governor
When using a Futaba governor, this function is
used to switch the RPM of the helicopter's head.
Up to 3 rates can be set for each condition.
*The governor is used by connecting the governor speed
setting channel to CH7 (initial setting).
*When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch,
connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor to
CH8 (initial setting) and set the switch to CH8 (Governor2)
at the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
*When using the Fuel Mixture function, the mixture servo
is controlled from the governor. When transmitting the
mixture curve data from the transmitter to the governor, the
governor AUX (m.trm) connector must be connected to CH8
(initial setting) and governor side setting performed. See the
governor instruction manual.
Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--] for
[Governor] and [Governor 2] of the Function menu
of the Linkage menu.
Select [Governor] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.
Fine tuning VR settings
RPM adjustment
Unit display selection:
[%] [rpm]
Setting method
●Activatethemixing
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON is
displayed.)
*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup
screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo
travel and limit point are now initialized.
*When changed from INH to ACT (ON), the servo travel is
initialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.
*When operation is changed to INH at all conditions, the
servo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point is
initialized to 135.
●RPMadjustment
Tap to the rate item.
Adjust the rpm using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 50% (1500rpm)
Adjustment range: OFF, 0~110% (OFF,
700~3500rpm)
*When the value is tapped reset to the initial value.
●Unitdisplayselection
Tap to the UNIT item [%] [rpm]. Select the
unit.
●Return to Model menu
174
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
●Diplaymodeselection
*When [rpm] mode is selected above setting, the display
mode can be selected.
* There is no change in the transmitter output even when the
"Mode" is changed. Calibration should be performed via the
governor.
* In order to use the Governor function of the T16IZ, it is
necessary to change the settings on the governor for the low
side 700 rpm mode.
 
When the Mode of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.
The chart below indicates the
mode percentage and the
corresponding RPM.
main rotor R.P.M.
3900rpm
2700rpm
2100rpm
0% 100% 110%
main rotor R.P.M. setting channel travel
50% : neutral
2500rpm
2000rpm
1500rpm
1000rpm
700rpm
3500rpm
●FinetuningVRsettings
Tap to the [--] item and tap the screen to
access the selection screen. Select the
control.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Tap to the rate item.
Adjust the trim rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲"
"▲▲" buttons.
Initial value: 0% (0rpm)
Adjustment range: -20~+20%
*When the screen is tapped for one second, the sensitivity is
reset to the initial value.
Tap the screen to return to the cursor mode.
175
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.Wirelesstunings:Gyrotuningscanbemadewirelessly.(Limiteditems)
T16IZ
CGY755/CGY760R
ForCGY755
(For CGY760R Use other receiver)
S.BUS2Receiver
WirelessTuningsfunctionlist
Do not set during ight. Make settings when
the aircraft is on the ground and the motor
and engine are stopped.
-FLT. TUNE
Base Gain: Gyro base gain setting
CYC. Rt: Cyclic rate setting
Cnt. AuthAIL: Control Authority Aileron
Cnt. AuthELE: Control Authority Elevator
EXPO.: Exponential
FLT. Styl: Flight style
ELE. Comp: Elevator pre compensation
-SWH. BASIC
SWS. Rate: Rate adjustment
PIT. Rate: Rate adjustment
SWS. Ring
- Governor Basic
GOV Gain: Governor gain
L Lmt. L rpm : Low limit hovering RPM
L Lmt. H rpm : Low limit idling RPM
-Flight Tune Expert
HeadHld A : Head hold aileron
StopTune A : Stop tune aileron
HeadResp: Head Response
HeadHld E: Head hold elevator
StopTune E : Stop tune elevator
-Rudder Expert
EXP. AVCS: Rudder exponential AVCS
EXP. NORM: Rudder exponential NORMAL
CNT. DlIn: Control delay in
CNT. DlOut: Control delay out
ANG: Pirouette speed
Tail Resp: Tail response
A.Wiredconnection:Advancedsettings(allfunctionssameasGPB-1)
T16IZ
S.I/F
P.BOX
CGYConnectionCable(includedwithgyro)
CGY755/CGY760R
● Connect the receiver battery (3.5 to 8.4
V) to
one of the "AIL" to "S.B2" connectors other
than "RPM" and "P.BOX".
(Do not connect to "RPM" and "P.BOX".)
Notes
If the T16IZ and gyro are not connected, the
gyro setting value cannot be changed.
Notes
When using the wireless tuning function, set
the telemetry function to ACT.
The wireless tuning can be FASSTest or
T-FHSS.
Gyro setting
The T16IZ has the same functions as the GPB-1.
The CGY755 / CGY760R can be set up from the
T16IZ screen by connecting to the T16IZ. Some
functions can be set wirelessly.
*CGY760R needs to be Ver3.0 ~. Update CGY760R.
176
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
A.Wiredconnection:Advancedsettings
1. Select "Gyro setting" on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu
*If "CRSF" is ON in the system type of the linkage
menu, "Gyro setting" cannot be selected.
3. Home screen is displayed
To basic menu
To expert menu
To receiver
2. Select "Start"
* At this time, if Gyro is not connected to T16IZ by wire, the EQ
ID screen appears.
1
3
2
SETTING
CAUTION
Be sure to connect and disconnect the CGY760R/CGY755 and
T16IZ connection cable with the power off.
When copying data from Gyro A to Gyro B
Connect the gyro A to the T16IZ and press [Start]. (Enter the data of A into T16IZ)
Connect Gyro B to T16IZ and press [GY Settings Transfer]. (Put data on A into gyro B)
Select "Start" This will download
the gyro data to the T16IZ.
When "GY Settings Transfer" is
selected, the gyro setting data saved
in T16IZ is written to the gyro.
If you press Start here, the B data will be written
to the T16IZ and the A data will be lost.
177
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.Wirelesstunings
To congure the Wireless tunings, set two consecutive
free channels to use for Wireless tunings in SBUS Basic
4/4.
Linkage menu → Function
Example using 13CH and 14CH
1. Select “Gyro setting” on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu
Before making Wireless tunings, it is necessary to download the setting data from the gyro to the T16IZ via a wired
connection.
Once the gyro data is stored in the T16IZ, if it is the same gyro, there is no need to make a wired connection from the second
time on. If you want to use another gyro, you need to reconnect the cable and download the data.
First, wired connection
Next, Wireless tunings
2. Select "Start"
This will download the gyro data to the T16IZ.
1
2
SETTING
T16IZ
S.I/F
P.BOX
CGY755/CGY760R
1
3. Select "Wireless Tuning"
3
2
4. Items that can be set wirelessly are displayed
4
1. Select “Gyro setting” on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu
2. Select "Start"
CGYConnectionCable(includedwithgyro)
● Connect the receiver battery (3.5 to 8.4
V) to
one of the "AIL" to "S.B2" connectors other
than "RPM" and "P.BOX".
(Do not connect to "RPM" and "P.BOX".)
2 consecutive free channels
Set Control and Trim to NULL ( -- ).
Check that the gyro to be
set matches the EQ ID.
When "GY Settings Transfer" is
selected, the gyro setting data saved
in T16IZ is written to the gyro.
178
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
HomeScreenHomeScreen
SWS.Rate
PIT.Rate
SWS.Ring
FLT.Styl
Cnt.AuthAI
Cnt.AuthEL
EXPO
ELE.Comp
HeadHld A
HeadHld E
StpTune A
StpTune E
HeadResp
BaseGain AI EL
CYC.Rt
GOV.Gain
L Lmt.H rpm
L Lmt.L rpm
SWS.Rate
PIT.Rate
SWS.Ring
FLT.Styl
Cnt.AuthAI
Cnt.AuthEL
EXPO
ELE.Comp
HeadHld A
HeadHld E
StpTune A
StpTune E
HeadResp
BaseGain AI EL
CYC.Rt
GOV.Gain
L Lmt.H rpm
L Lmt.L rpm
ond1 (Condition 1)
Switch DG1
ond2 (Condition2)
Neutral
Switch Channel Rate
WideNarrow
-100% 100%-35% 35%0%
*Indicates when the setup style is "3D".
Cond1 Cond2
Switch Channel Rate
Neutral
Cond1
Cond3
Cond5Cond4Cond2
-100% 100%-25%-75% 75%25%0%
-100%
100%
0%
Swash plate type
Displays the swash plate type set in
"SWH. BASIC" menu.
Home Screen Display
On the home screen, basic information such as swash type,
gyro operation mode, sensitivity and governor ON / OFF,
engine operating time etc, are displayed.
Forfunctionsthatcansetconditionsin
thismanual,mark
Cond
iswritten.
Condition number
With switch operation from the transmitter, several parameters can be switched by
setting up to 5 types of data. If you set the condition switch to the channel having
the AFR function of the transmitter and set the point for each flight condition with the
AFR point curve, it can also be linked with the flight condition switch.
• When either the DG1 or DG 2 switch is selected, the following options are available.
Function Menu of your transmitter (DG1). Assigning DG1 to a switch or ight mode allows the
use of two separate values for the condition selectable parameters.
• If you set a condition switch channel, using the AFR function on that channel set a flat point
curve for each flight condition. Then you can utilize all 5 flights conditions.
Set the point curve with AFR for each flight condition of the transmitter.
Governor ON / OFF
Indicates the ON / OFF switch status of the
governor function. When "ON" is displayed, the
governor function is activated.
Gyro operation mode /
Gyro gain
Displays "AVCS" or "Normal" operation
mode and gyro gain of aileron (roll),
elevator (pitch) and rudder (yaw) axis.
Roll and Elevator rate maximum display
This screen displays the maximum roll rate and maximum eleva-
tor rate recorded during flight. Data is reset when the power is
turned off. If you want to check the maximum rate, leave the pow-
er on after flight. Press and hold rate button to reset the display.
Battery voltage
Displays the voltage of the
receiver battery connected
to CGY.
RPM display
The maximum RPM of the engine or rotor head RPM
memorized by the governor during operation is displayed.
Data is reset when the power is turned off. If you want to
check multiple times during the flight, leave the power on
after flight. Press and hold RPM button to reset the display.
Engine running time
Displays the running time of the engine. Up to 9,999
hours are displayed.
Press and hold time button to reset the display. The
operation time is stored in memory even when the
power is turned off until it is reset.
179
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
HomeScreen
Expertmenuscreen
Receiverscreen
Basicmenuscreen
Flight Tune
Aileron, Elevator
Swash Basic
Swash
Rud Basic
Rudder
Gov Basic
Governor
S.BUS Basic
Swash Detail
Swash
Flight Tune Expert
Aileron
Rudder Expert
Rudder
Governor Expert
Governor
Internal Rx
RF type
HomeScreenHomeScreen
180
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
BasicMenuBasicMenu
As the name suggests, this menu allows changes to the basic settings of CGY.
Make sure to set each
"
BASIC MENU
"
.
Basicmenuscreen
Flight Tune
Aileron, Elevator
Swash Basic
Swash
Rud Basic
Rudder
Gov Basic
Governor
S.BUS Basic
181
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
S.BUSBasicMenuS.BUSBasicMenu
The channel of each function
can be changed.
This resets the S.BUS channel assign-
ments back to the defaults.
The
"
SBUS BASIC
"
screen is accessed via the
"
BASIC MENU
"
screen. Set the CH for each function according to the transmitter to be used.
Any unused functions should be set to INH (Inhibited). For example, if the Gain A/E and Gain RUD remote gain functions are not going to
be used, then set them to [INH]. The CGY760R/CGY755 will then allow you to make gain adjustments within the respective menu.
WARNING
Always verify that the S.BUS function as-
signments match your transmitter’s function
(in the FUNCTION menu) assignments. If any
changes are made within the transmitter func-
tion assignments, then it will also be neces-
sary to make the changes within the S.BUS
function assignments. To change the channel,
CGY and T16IZ must be connected.
ELE2 channel Servo Type
(If you want to use the ELE2 port for purposes other than swash.)
This selects the ELE2 servo types. There are three types of the servo
driving frequency selection, AN:70
Hz, DG285
Hz, and 760
μS. All Futaba
digital servos can be operated with fastest DG:285
Hz mode but some
of other brands of servos do not support DG:285
Hz mode. In this case,
select the proper servo driving frequency per the manufacturer’s specifi-
cations.
If you select H4-00 or H4-45 with 4 servo swashes, cannot set this ELE2
port servo type. In that case, select all swash servo types in SWH basic
servo type.
Setting:AN:70
Hz/DG:760
μS/DG:285
Hz Initialsetting:DG:285
Hz
WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type of
servo you are using. Incorrect setting may damage the CGY or the
servo. Incorrect setting may also result in a loss of control during
flight.
S. BUS connection: Condition on change channel
Using the methodology described previously, determine the "Cond CH #" and
set the condition change channel of the transmitter. In this example, DG1 is the
conditional change channel.
As with the flight condition function of the transmitter, it is possible to utilize
pre-determined settings, each activated by a switch or switches on the
transmitter. By setting the condition switch on the channel with the AFR
function of the transmitter and setting the point for each flight condition with
the AFR point curve, you can switch the condition of CGY760R/CGY755 in
conjunction with the flight condition switch of the transmitter.
Wireless channel
The wireless channel uses two consecutive channels. For example, if CH13
is set to "# 1", CH14 is automatically set to "# 2". Therefore, when using this
function, two consecutive free channels are required for the transmitter. It is not
possible to use a channel assign that is used for another function.
CAUTION
Be sure to check the operation for all conditions 1 to 5 before flying.
The setting of "wireless CH" is possible only when the transmitter
and the CGY are powered off and the CGY is turned on.
Be sure to connect and disconnect the CGY and T16IZ connection cable
with the power off.
2 consecutive free channels
182
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SwashBasicSwashBasic
The green display is the current state.
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R
Gyro Set Dir--- 1
Gyro Set Dir--- 4
Gyro Set Dir--- 5
Gyro Set Dir--- 6
Gyro Set Dir--- 2
Gyro Set Dir--- 3
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R
*Depending on the type of mounting plate,
it is also possible to mount as shown in
the figure.
*Depending on the type of mounting plate,
it is also possible to mount as shown in
the figure.
AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N
CGY755 has no antenna
This menu is utilized to perform the basic setup of swash motion.
"
SWH. BASIC
"
screen from the
"
BASIC MENU
"
screen.
The CGY760R/CGY755 is compatible with the following six types
swash plate.
WARNING
Do not connect the servo to the gyros until you select the
servo type in the "SWH. BASIC" menu.
*If the servo type is incorrect, it is possible to damage the servos or CGY.
(1) Setup style
3D mode contains a proven set of parameters which are good for not
only 3D but also F3C flying. F3C Mode and L.SCALE (Large scale
model) Mode are for unique or special tuning types only.
*When the style is changed, setting of AIL/ELE/RUD is re-initialized and
defaults are changed.
L.SCALE:Initialparametermodecorrespondingtoalargemachinewitha
totallengthof2.5
mormore.
(2) Gyro Set Dir: Mounting direction
Set the roll axis, pitch axis, yaw axis according to the mounting direction
of CGY. When the LED on the Gx side finishes blinking, please turn the
power off and on again to confirm that it is working properly.
Setting:1 ~ 6Initialsetting:1
WARNING
Ifyoudonotturnthepowerbackonafterchanging"GyroSetDir",thegyro
willnotoperateproperly,thereisariskofcrashing.
(3) Servo Type
This selects the swash servo types. There are four types or modes of the servo driving
frequency selection, AN:70
Hz, DG:95
Hz, DG:140
Hz, DG285
Hz, and 760
μS. All Futaba
digital servos can be operated with fastest DG:285
Hz mode but some of other brands of
servos do not support DG:285
Hz mode. In this case, select the proper servo driving fre-
quency per the manufacturer’s specifications.
Setting:AN:70
Hz/DG:95
Hz/DG:140
Hz/DG:760
μS/DG:285
Hz
Initialsetting:DG:285
Hz
WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type of servo you are
using. Incorrect setting may damage the CGY or the servo. Incorrect setting may
also result in a loss of control during flight.
183
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SwashBasicSwashBasic
H-1
Swash Type
ELE
PIT AIL
H3-120
ELE
PIT AIL
H3-140
ELE
PIT AIL
H3-90
ELE2
ELE
PIT AIL
H4-00
ELE2
FRONT
ELE
PIT
AIL
H4-45
ELE
PIT
AIL
H-1
(4) SWASH Type: Swash change to plate type
Select the swash plate type. When you change the setting, other data is
initialized.
Setting:H-1
/
H3-120
/
H3-140
/
H3-90
/
H4-00
/
H4-45   Initialsetting:H3-120
WARNING
All of the swash plate parameters are reset when the swash plate
type is changed. Doing so eliminates any possible errors or mal-
functions within the system. After changing the swash plate type,
Please proceed through the entire setup process once again before
attempting to fly the model.
AIL --------------------Aileron servo
ELE ----------------- Elevator servo
PIT --------- Collective pitch servo
ELE2 ---- Second elevator servo
Your transmitter should be reset to the default settings and the swash plate
type selected with the transmitter should be set to "H-1" or single servo
mode. All CCPM mixing is set up and handled in the CGY, and the transmit-
ter functions should not be used. Before starting model set-up, be sure that
all dual rates, pitch curve, and endpoint values are set to 100/100.
(5) Servo Dir #: Servo direction #
Using different servo combinations will create the proper swash plate servo
movement in electronic CCPM models (eCCPM). In the H3-xx swash
mode, three of the swash servos directions are changed by pressing the
Servo Dir #. Choose the combination number which produces level swash
plate travel with a collective pitch input from the transmitter. There are 8
combination choices for the H3-xx swash mode. On H4-xx swash mode,
there are 16 combination choices. After selecting the combination number,
aileron, elevator, pitch, and 2nd elevator servo parameters are automati-
cally set.
Note: Occasionally the aileron or elevator function directions are reversed
even though collective pitch direction is correct. In this case, use the "SWS.
Dir parameter on the following screen (4/6) to fix this later.
184
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SwashBasicSwashBasic
(6)AIL, ELE, PIT. Ntr:
Servo neutral adjustment
Adjust the neutral position of the swash servo (aileron, elevator, pitch,
second elevator). The second elevator (ELE2) is displayed only when the
swash type is H4-xx.
Settingranges:+240 ~ -240Initialvalue:0
(7) SWS. Dir: Swash direction setting
This selects the aileron, elevator and collective pitch direction. Reverse
the direction when the stick movement and swash movement are oppo-
site. Each time you press the +/- button, the polarity switches.
(8) SWS. Rate: Rate adjustment
The Swash Rate settings are used to set a known base cyclic throw for the
gyro to calculate the compensations and gain scale. This value does not
represent the total cyclic throw, but rather shows the gyro a known point
for the gyro to understand the helicopters geometry. It is important to note
that one setting applies to both roll and pitch axes; they are not individually
adjusted.
(DUAL RATES MUST BE 100)
-Suggested amount of base cyclic pitch
*800 size – 10 degrees
*700 size – 9 degrees
*600 - 550 size – 8 degrees
*500 size – 7 degrees
*450 and below- 6 degrees
Settingranges:0~100%Initialvalue:50%
(9) PIT. Rate: Rate adjustment
The [PIT.Rate] is the amount of collective pitch travel allowed. A good
starting range for Sport, 3D and F3C is +/-10 to +/-12 degrees.
Settingranges:0~100Initialvalue:50%
(10) SWS. Ring
This parameter is used to set the total maximum of cyclic throw as well as
limit the swash travel to prevent binding of the swash plate servos when the
control stick is moved toward a corner (for example, full right and full aft cy-
clic).
Settingranges:50~100%Initialvalue:130%
(11)
AGy. Dir: Aileron (roll) Gyro direction
EGy. Dir: Elevator (pitch) Gyro direction
This parameter controls which direction the CGY (roll / pitch axis) will
compensate when the helicopter rolls (pitches). Pick the helicopter up
and roll the helicopter to the right. The CGY should compensate by add-
ing left cyclic to the swash plate. (Pick the helicopter up and rotate the
nose of the helicopter downward. The CGY should compensate by adding
aft cyclic to the swash plate.)
If the CGY compensates in the wrong direction, then it will be necessary
to reverse the compensation direction setting.
WARNING
Verify that the CGY compensates in the correct direction before
flight. If the compensation direction is incorrect the model will roll
or pitch uncontrollably even before it leaves the ground.
(13) STK. Dir ELE: Elevator operation
Load the direction of elevator into the gyro.
[Setting method] Touch the "Up" button to enter the setting mode.
"Sure?" Is displayed. Operate the elevator stick fully to the up. If you touch
the [Yes] button, the operation direction of elevator is memorized.
(12) STK. Dir AIL: Aileron operation
Load the direction of Aileron into the gyro.
[Setting method] Touch the "Right" button to enter the setting mode.
"Sure?" Is displayed. Operate the Aileron stick fully to the right. If you
touch the [Yes] button, the operation direction of Aileron is memorized.
Be sure to set this aileron motion direction and elevator motion direction
so that F/F mixing (Ele Comp and Rud. F/F menu) works effectively. Also,
please perform this operation after setting the direction of operation.
*The current condition number of CGY is displayed.
*The setting with "C#" display can be set for each condition.
1. Use the "C#" button to select the condition number.
2. Next, adjust value of the condition selected by the
rate
button.
Forfunctionsthatcansetconditionsin
thismanual,mark
Cond
iswritten.
Cond
Cond
Cond
WARNING
Verify that the CGY compensates in the correct direction before
flight. If the compensation direction is incorrect the model will roll
or pitch uncontrollably even before it leaves the ground.
185
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SwashBasicSwashBasic
(14) Pit.
High: Pitch high memorizing
This parameter saves the full positive collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. High" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick fully to the high. Touch the “Pit. High” rate
button again. ”Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The full
positive pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.
(15) Pit. Zero: Pitch zero memorizing
This parameter saves the zero collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. Zero" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick to 0 degree pitch. Touch the “Pit. Zero” rate
button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The zero
pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.
(16) Pit. Low: Pitch low memorizing
This parameter saves the full negative collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. Low" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick fully to the low. Touch the “Pit. Low” rate
button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The full
negative pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.
186
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
FlightTune(Aileron/ElevatorBasicsettings) FlightTune(Aileron/ElevatorBasicsettings)
Flight tune sets control of helicopter roll (aileron) and pitch (elevator) axis. "FLT.
TUNE" screen from the "BASIC MENU" screen.
(2) CYC. Rt: Cyclic rate setting
Cyclic rate sets the maximum Cyclic rate sets the maximum roll and flip
rate (d/s) as limited by the model’s ability to reach that set rate. Flip and
roll rates are set together with this single parameter.
Settingranges:10~500
d/sInitialvalue:300
d/s
Cond
(1) Base. Gain: Gyro base gain setting
This sets the Cyclic Gyro Base Gain. If the Rotor Head Gain (Rot HD Gn)
Channels are set to "INH" within the CGY "SBUS.BASIC" menu, then the
remote transmitter gain adjustment is not available. Thus the actual work-
ing gain for the cyclic gyros is set by using the "Base Gain" button within
this parameter.
Set to 100, a transmitter Gain value of 100% will display 100% on this
parameter. If a pilot is in need of more gain, base gain can be increased to
allow the gain on the CGY to be higher than 100%.
Note: If using a 6
CH or less "Base Gain" is equivalent to the rotor head
gain and can be adjusted manually on the gyro instead of via the transmit-
ter.
Settingranges:0~150%Initialvalue:100%
Cond
187
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
FlightTune(Aileron/ElevatorBasicsettings) FlightTune(Aileron/ElevatorBasicsettings)
(3) Cnt. AuthAIL: Control Authority Aileron
Aileron Control Authority changes the rate at which the gyro will try to
achieve the set "CYC. Rt". A higher value will create a quicker accelerated
reaction to a stick input to reach and stabilize to the "CYC. Rt" value; a
lower value will reach the desired "CYC. Rt" slower and accelerate slower
to the desired angular rate.
Note: Setting this value too high could lead to a jerky feeling when mak-
ing rapid stick corrections, a value too low will give you the impression the
model is not following the pilot’s stick inputs. Values of between 20-60 are
the suggested range for most helicopters.
Settingranges:0~100%
Initialvalue:Cnt.AuthAIL=40%
(4) Cnt. AuthELE: Control Authority Elevator
Elevator Control Authority changes the rate at which the gyro will try to
achieve the set "CYC. Rt". A higher value will create a quicker accelerated
reaction to a stick input to reach and stabilize at the "CYC. Rt" value; a
lower value will reach the desired "CYC. Rt" slower and accelerate slower
to the desired angular rate.
Note: Setting this value too high could lead to a jerky feeling when mak-
ing rapid stick corrections, a value too low will give you the impression the
model is not following the pilot’s stick inputs. Values of between 20-60 are
the suggested range for most helicopters.
Settingranges:0~100%
Initialvalue:Cnt.AuthELE=40%
(5) EXPO.: Exponential
Tune the exponential as desired to change the feel of the cyclic controls
around center stick. Negative values soften control feel; Positive values
increase sensitivity.
Note: that any exponential present in the TRANSMITTER adds to the value
set in the CGY.
Settingranges:-100~0~+100%Initialvalue:-20%
(6) FLT. Styl: Flight style
Increasing this value will create a more robotic reaction to the stick, leaving
the pilot with the impression that the model is locked into in a position after
an input. It will also tend to have a more calculated feeling when making
inputs.
-Lowering the value will make the model feel more fluid and easy to rotate with
the stick input. The model will feel a little more lively during faster cyclic move-
ments and direction changes.
Settingranges:0~+100
nInitialvalue:+50
n
Cond
Cond
Cond
Cond
188
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
FlightTune(Aileron/ElevatorBasicsettings) FlightTune(Aileron/ElevatorBasicsettings)
Note
:
To effectively operate the next "ELE Comp"
(elevator correction), make sure to set "Pit High", "Pit
Zero", "Pit Low" on the "SWASH BASIC" menu.
(7) ELE. Comp: Elevator pre compensation
A helicopter that has a head that rotates clockwise, will exhibit a tendency
whereby the nose will be pulled towards the disk with positive blade pitch.
Conversely, the helicopter will push the nose away from the rotor disk dur-
ing negative pitch inputs. In an instance of a slower servo set-up or larger
(heavier) rotor blades, a small amount of elevator pre compensation may
be needed to keep the nose of the helicopter flat at all times during col-
lective pitch changes. In most cases with helicopter high-speed servos
and standard 3D rotor blades, this function is not needed. If you do notice
a slight tendency for the nose to try to rise or fall with collective input, in-
creasing "ELE Comp" will reduce this behavior.
Settingranges:0~100%Initialvalue:0%
(8) HP. Auth.: High pitch authority
When a rotor blades angle of attack is increased, the rotor blade becomes
less reactive, in turn the helicopter might not feel as reactive at high pitch
angles. If you want to increase the reaction of the cyclic during loaded and
high pitch maneuvers, "HP. Auth" will increase control authority and can be
used to make the helicopter feel more linear under loading. Some helicop-
ters with direct link CCPM may use this to increase stability at high collec-
tive pitch flying as well. If a helicopter feels good for normal flying, but not
the same during loaded situations, "HP. Auth" can be used to make it feel
more linear. If "HP. Auth" is set very high, the helicopter will feel more ag-
gressive at high pitch than around neutral.
Settingranges:0~100%Initialvalue:HP.Auth=0%
Cond
189
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
RudderBasicRudderBasic
In the
"
Rudder Basic
"
menu, you make the basic setting of the rudder gyro.
"
Rudder Basic
"
screen from the
"
BASIC MENU
"
screen.
WARNING
Do not connect the tail rotor servo to the gyro until the
servo type has been selected. Operating the servo using the
incorrect setting may damage the CGY or the servo.
Do not operate with the linkage connected until the "Srv.
Limit" function correctly sets the servo limit point. If the
servo operates beyond the linkage operating range, there is a
danger of either the servo or helicopter being damaged.
WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must
match the type of servo you are using. Incorrect
settings may damage the CGY or the servo. An
incorrect setting may also result in a loss of control
during flight.
(1) Servo Type
Select the appropriate setting for the tail rotor servo.
Setting:Analog/DG:1520/DG760
Initialsetting:DG:1520
DG1520:BLS254,BLS257,S9254,S9257
DG760:BLS276SV,BLS251SB,BLS251,S9256,S9251
(2) Gyro. Dir: Gyro direction
This parameter controls which direction the CGY (yaw axis) will compen-
sate when the helicopter rotates. Hold the tail rotor linkage over the link-
age ball on the servo, pick the helicopter up by the main shaft and rotate
the mechanics counter-clockwise. The CGY should compensate by adding
clockwise rotation pitch to the tail rotor blades. If the CGY compensates by
adding counter-clockwise rotation pitch to the tail rotor blades, then it will
be necessary to reverse the Compensation Direction setting by pressing
the "Gyro Dir".
Settingvalue:Normal/ReverseInitialvalue:Normal
(3) Work Mode: Gyro working mode
The available choices are CMT, Normal or AVCS. The CMT mode will allow
you to select either AVCS or Normal mode via the transmitter. In Normal
mode the gyro will always operate in Normal Rate Mode, and when AVCS
is selected, it will always operate in AVCS Mode.
Setting:CMT/Normal/AVCSInitialsetting:CMT
(4) GY. Gain: Gyro base gain setting
This parameter sets the base gain of the gyro. This can be used to adjust
the gain % if your actual transmitter gain does not match the gain on the
CGY correctly.
Settingranges:0~150%Initialvalue:100%
(5) Srv. Limit: Limit setting
When the CGY is in the "Srv.Limit" parameter mode, the gyro will no lon-
ger operate and the tail servo will always center when the tail rotor stick
is released. Always exit the setup functions before attempting to fly the
model. Before each flight, always ensure that the gyros are operating and
compensating in the correct direction. The Servo Limit parameter within
the CGY is used to set the mechanical limits for the tail rotor servo. To
obtain the best performance it is recommended to set the limit in the CGY
to 100% for both directions and then adjust the servo arm length to set the
mechanical endpoints. After that has been completed, use the servo limit
parameter to make small adjustments that could not be made mechani-
cally. Values between 90% and 110% are considered optimal.
[ Setting method ]
Operate the rudder stick right or left in the direction you want to set. Touch
the button that is lit in green to set the limit. Do the same for the other side.
WARNING
When using the CGY for the first time, or when making mechani-
cal changes involving throw, you must check and set the servo limits
again to prevent binding.
190
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
GovernorBasicGovernorBasic
This menu sets the governor’s fundamental functions. The menu Servo limit point set-
ting must be set rst.
"
Governor Basic
"
screen from the
"
BASIC MENU
"
screen.
Note: When using the governor function, be sure
to make each setting of "Governor Basic".
Note: After completing the linkage of the throttle,
be sure to set the "Servo limit point setting" first,
and then set the other functions.
(1) Governor: Governor active
Set the governor operation mode of CGY. The initial setting is "ACT (active)"
where, as the designation implies, the governor is active. If you do not want
to use governor, select "INH (Inhibit)".
Setting:ACT(Active)/INH(Inhibit)Initialsetting:ACT
(2) Gear Ratio:
Input the main rotor gear ratio by pushing the "Gear Ratio" button to select
the desired working mode.
Settingranges:1.00~50.00
tInitialvalue:8.00

t
Notes:
If the gear ratio is not properly set, the
set speed and actual engine speed will
be different.
The gear ratio should be given in the
helicopter instruction manual. If the
helicopter instruction manual does not
give the gear ratio, calculate the gear
ratio as follows:
Rotor
main gear
N1
Engine
pinion gear
N2
Gear ratio = N1/N2
Carry values less than 1/1000 to the
next whole number.
(3) Pole Num.: Pole number
This parameter is used when using a direct phase sensor attachment to a
brushless motor lead. Input the motor pole count as specified by the brush-
less motor manufacturer. When using any revolution sensor other than a
direct phase sensor type, set the pole number to 2
p.
Note: For nitro use, set to 2
p.
Note: The input signal range of the CGY is 0.0
v - 3.0
v. Exceeding this volt-
age range may cause damage to the CGY.
Settingranges:2-24
PInitialvalue:2
P
(4) Servo Type
Select the throttle servo type. Digital servos offer the best response.
Setting:Analog/DG:1520Initialsetting:Analog
WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type of
servo you are using. Incorrect settings may damage the CGY or the
servo. An incorrect setting may also result in the loss of control during
flight.
(5) RPM set.: RPM setting
Setting the main rotor RPM. This is calculated by engine revolution with
the gear ratio of the main shaft.
When the rotation speed can be set with the governor mixing function of
the transmitter, it is necessary to first match the display rpm value of 1-2-3
of "RPM Set" with the display rpm value of the transmitter.
Settingranges:off/700~4,000
rpmInitialvalue:1,000

rpm
*Tosetlowerthan1,000
rpm,set"Low.Revo"of"GovernorExpert"menuto700

rpm.
191
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
GovernorBasicGovernorBasic
(6) Stick sw.: Stick switch
The governor can be activated by throttle stick position.
[Setting method] Touch the "Stick SW" button to enter the setting mode.
Operate the throttle stick to the position where you want to turn Governor
ON. Touch the “Stick SW” button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch
the [Yes] button, the ON position is memorized. This stick switch function is
always enabled when the next "ON / OFF sw" is "INH" or the "Governor ON /
OFF switch is not set by S.BUS setting.
Whengovernoristurnedonando󰮏bytransmitterthrottlestick
The data is set so that the governor can be
turned on and off with the transmitter throttle
stick position. The following describes this op-
eration.
Throttle stick over set point and more than 60%
of set rotation speed.
ON
*This is the setting value of "Gov. On. Revo: Gov-
ernor ON revolution setting".
Throttle stick held at the set point or more Re-
mains.
ON
Throttle stick position is below the set point se-
lected.
OFF
When idle up
When the throttle curve is set at idle up, and when the throttle output is over the set
value (initial value: 30%), the governor will always and remain ON even if the stick is
lowered to the bottom.
(OFF at slow side)
Set point or less
0%
100%
(Governor operating point)
Set speed
The stick is at, or be-
yond the set point and
is 60% of the rotation
speed value of the gov-
ernor.
When you activate the switch, the direction setting of the switch is displayed.
Select the switch ON / OFF direction (Normal / Reverse).
Whenturningon/o󰮏governorwithswitch
Select the ON / OFF switch channel with "GOV sw channel" on "SBUS BASIC"
menu.
Setting the switch to the ON position turns on, or enables the
governor. The following describes this operation.
Switch set to on position and engine running at 60% or more
of set speed ON
Throttle stick set to maximum slow position ON
Switch set to off position
OFF
(7) ON/OFF sw.: Governor on/o switch
This parameter allows the user to turn the governor on or off via a switch
on the transmitter. Choose INH if you do not want to use it.
Governor can be turned
on and off by a switch.
When Battery Fail Safe is enabled, items for setting the throttle servo posi-
tion are displayed. The setting method is the same as "Stick sw", so please
refer to this section of the manual for information on setting this function.
(8) BAT F/S: Battery fail safe
When the receiver battery voltage becomes equal to or less than "BFS.
Volt" set in the "Governor Expert" menu, the battery fail safe function is ac-
tivated, the governor function is turned OFF, and the throttle servo moves
to the set position.
If the battery voltage is lower than the set voltage of the "Battery F/
S" for about 3 seconds, the Gx (gyro) LED of the CGY solid red light.
When "Battery F/S" is set to "ACT" in "GOV BASIC", the servo is fixed
to the throttle position set by "Battery F/S". When the throttle stick is
set to the slowest position, the "Battery F/S" function is temporarily
canceled. However, after 30 seconds, the "Battery F/S" function is
activated again and the servo is locked. When the "Battery F/S" oper-
ates, quickly landing and stopping the helicopter, please charge the
battery.
WARNING
When using the CGY for the first time, or when making changes in
the throw of a servo and its linkage, always perform the limit setting
operation.
WARNING
When using the CGY for the first time, or when making changes in
the throw of a servo and its linkage, always perform the limit setting
operation.
(9) Lim. set: Servo limit point setting
Servo limit point setting defines the overall travel range for the throttle ser-
vo. It is fundamental for governor operation and must be set prior to other
functions. Servo limits must also be reset when the throttle linkage or trim
are changed.
How to set the servo limit point:
Touch the “Lim.Set Id” button to enter the setting mode.
Set the transmitter’s
throttle stick to the idle position.
Touch the “Lim.Set Id” button again.
The
limit of idle will be saved to the CGY.
The cursor will move to "Lim. Set Hi".
Set the stick to the full high position.
Touch the “Lim.Set Hi” button again.
The limit of high will be saved to the CGY.
If the setting data is not normal
(servo operation amount is 50% or less), "Err" is displayed. In this case,
check the transmitter setting and repeat this procedure once again.
(10) Limit Test: Check the set limit point
Check the set limit point. Press "Idle" or "High" to move the servo to each
limit point. Press “End” to end the test.
192
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
GovernorBasicGovernorBasic
(11) SenseTyp: Sensor type
Select the type of governor sensor.
Nitro (BPS-1 backplate; Magnet Type)
1:1 Magnet "1:1 Magn" (Magnet type applied to helicopter part that turns at
the same RPM as the main rotor)
HPoleEP: For Electric motors 8 poles and above
LPoleEP: For electric motors 6 poles.
(12) GOV Gain: Governor gain
Governor Gain. If the value of the Governor Gain is set too low, the heli-
copter's RPM will fluctuate with collective and cyclic pitch changes. Con-
versely, if the number is too high, the RPM itself will fluctuate and surge
during flight.
Settingranges:1~100%
Initialvalue:Nitro=40%,1:1Magn=60%,HPoleEP=30%,LPoleEP=10%
Cond
(13) L Lmt. L rpm / H rpm: Low limit RPM
Low RPM Limit sets the minimum amount of throttle that the governor will
command during an over-speed situation. Too low of value the engine
could shut off or not recover power quickly enough during the next collec-
tive movement. If the value is set too high, the governor will not control
overspeed when the rotor head is unloaded.
Use:
L Lmt. L rpm: For RPMS of 700-1700
L Lmt. H rpm For RPMS of 1701-4000
Settingranges:LLmt.L
rpm=0~80%,LLmt.H
rpm=10~80%
Initialvalue:LLmt.L
rpm=25%,LLmt.H
rpm=45%
Cond
(14) SBUS2 rpm out: RPM display on transmitter
When displaying the rpm with the telemetry function, set it to ACT.
Setting:ACT(Active)/INH(Inhibit)Initialsetting:INH
(15) SBUS2 rpm Slot: RPM display on transmitter
Set the slot number of the telemetry rotation sensor registered on the
transmitter side.
Thismustbesetsothatnoslotsoverlaponeanother.
(16) Rev. Sensor: Revolution sensor testing
This menu is utilized to ensure that the revolution sensor is functioning properly.
In order to test the sensor, do NOT start the engine. Instead, we recommend turning the engine over by hand or the utilization of a starter. To prevent inadvertent
ignition of the engine, do NOT use a glow plug igniter when turning the engine over.
The numerical values on the left side of the display are the current value. The right side of the display indicates the maximum sensor value. The output level needs
to be more than 60% for correct governor operation. Also, when using the backplate sensor, the signal level of the backplate sensor varies depending on the rota-
tion speed (3,000
rpm or more is the detectable rotation speed).
By the telemetry function, the number of revolutions read by the governor sensor can be displayed on the monitor of the transmitter. In order to be able to display, activate the telemetry
rotation sensor (SBS-01RM) on the transmitter and set the gear ratio to 1.00.
Note: It can not be used when the transmitter is FASSTest 12
CH system.
193
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
ExpertMenuExpertMenu
This menu enables the user to further rene the gyro and governor settings.
ExpertMenu
Swash Detail
Swash
Flight Tune Expert
Aileron
Elevator
Rudder Expert
Rudder
Governor Expert
Governor
194
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
RudderExpertRudderExpert
The rudder Expert menu allows for further renement of the tail rotor gyro performance. "Rudder Expert" screen from the "EXPERT MENU
3D" screen.
(1) RUD Ntr: Rudder servo neutral setting
This parameter is used to set the neutral position of the rudder servo. Po-
sition the rudder servo arm as perpendicular as possible to the tail rotor
pushrod prior to making adjustments with this parameter.
Settingranges:-240~0~+240Initialvalue:+0
(2) EXP. AVCS / EXP. NORM: Rudder exponential
This parameter sets the feel of the tail rotor control around center. When
set to [0] the control curve is linear. Using a [+] value the tail rotor will be
more sensitive around neutral conversely, using a [-] value will soften the
feeling around neutral. The RUD EXP parameter in your transmitter can
also be used to tune the tail rotor to a desired feeling.
Settingranges:-100~0~+100%Initialvalue:AVCS=-20%,NORM=-20%
Sports=AVCS-60%/NORMAL-40%,3D=AVCS-20%/NORMAL-20%>
195
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
RudderExpertRudderExpert
(3) CNT. DlIn: Control delay in
This parameter sets the delay as you move the stick from neutral toward
left or right. Larger values result in a softer tail rotor feel off center. This
parameter must be adjusted individually for LEFT and RIGHT tail rotor
commands. Follow these same procedures to adjust the tail rotor feel in the
opposite direction.
[ Setting method ]
Move the transmitter Rudder stick right or left in the direction you want to
set. Touch the green button to enter the setting mode and set the delay
amount. Do the same for the other side.
Settingranges:0~20
nInitialvalue:15
n
(4) CNT. DlOut: Control delay out
This parameter sets the delay when the stick is returned back to the neu-
tral position. This parameter is useful to tune how aggressively the tail
rotor stops following a pirouette. The higher the value, the softer the stop.
This parameter must be adjusted individually for LEFT and RIGHT tail rotor
commands. The setting method is the same as "CNT. DlIn", so please refer
to the information above.
Settingranges:0~20
nInitialvalue:12
n
(5) ANG: Pirouette speed
This parameter adjusts the maximum pirouette speed of the tail rotor that
the gyro will allow at 100% dual rate.
Settingranges:100~999
dInitialvalue:=720
d,
196
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
RudderExpertRudderExpert
(6) F/F.Rate U / F/F.Rate D: F/F mixing rate
Feed Forward mix is used to counteract sudden increases in torque from the
motor during fast collective pitch changes. If you notice a tail kick, using (right
rudder on Clockwise rotor disk, left rudder on CCW) F/F mixing can be tuned
to reduce the tail kick. The mixing amount can be individually set for high pitch
side (U) and low pitch (D) side with zero pitch as the center.
Settingranges:-100~0~+100%Initialvalue:+0%
(7) ACC Gain: F/F mixing acceleration gain
In low head speed situations where a lot of F/F Mixing might be needed,
acc. gain boosts the input and removes it immediately after to help cure the
sudden change in torque, but it does not allow the large tail rotor input to
alter the axial behavior of the helicopter.
Settingranges:0~200%Initialvalue:0%
(8) Tail Resp: Tail response
The goal is to match the response between the helicopter tail response and the
gyro control. This feature is utilized to do so. 1 is the fastest response. Gener-
ally, if the tail response is slow or the servo's speed is slow, setting the tail
response setting late will increase the gyro sensitivity and improve the control
performance. Also, if the response setting is delayed, the power consumption of
the servo will be reduced. However, if the response setting is too late, the opera-
tion cannot keep up with high-speed operation of the helicopter.
Settingranges:1~5Initialvalue:1
(9) RESET : Rudder gyro data reset
This resets the "Rudder Expert" setting back to the defaults.
197
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
FlightTuneExpert(Aileron/ElevatorGyroExpertSetting)FlightTuneExpert(Aileron/ElevatorGyroExpertSetting)
The
"
Flight Tune Expert
"
menus allow further renement of cyclic gyro performance.
"
Flight Tune Expert
"
screen
from the
"
EXPERT MENU 3D
"
screen.
(1) HeadHld A / HeadHld E: Head hold aileron / elevator
This features is used to adjust the heading hold aspect of the gyro control.
If the helicopter is not holding angle or cyclic control rates, increasing the
heading hold gain will improve holding the helicopter at a certain angle and
improve the cyclic rate consistency. If this is set too high you could see an
oscillation on that axis. Lowering the heading hold below default would be
used if the transmitter gain is reduced and a consistent oscillation is still
not fixed during flight.
Settingranges:0~200%Initialvalue:80%
(2) StopTune A : Stop tune aileron
Cyclic stop tuning on the aileron axis. If the helicopter continues to coast
after an after an ail roll, lowering "StpTune A" will create a harder stop action
to remove the coasting. If the helicopter bounces on the aileron axis after an
aileron control input, increasing "StpTune A" will reduce this bounce.
Settingranges:0~250%Initialvalue:80%
(3) StopTune E: Stop tune elevator
Cyclic stop tuning on the elevator axis. If the helicopter, after an elevator
flip, continues to coast, lowering "StopTune E" will create a harder stop
action to remove the coasting. If the helicopter continues to coast after an
elevator flip, lowering the "Stop tune E" will reduce this bounce.
Settingranges:0~250%Initialvalue:80%
(4) HeadResp: Head Response
Head Response matches the gyro control speed to that which the heli-
copter is capable of reacting. In a standard helicopter a Head Response
of 1 should always be used, but on some scale applications, or uniquely
designed rotor heads, increasing head response might be needed to cure
over correction of the gyro.
Settingranges:1~10Initialvalue:1
(5) DeadBand: Dead band
Transmitter control dead band. If you are noticing inconsistent swash plate
drift or poor initialization it could be poor transmitter potentiometer resolu-
tion. If you have to increase this value beyond 10.0, it is best to check
calibration on your transmitter.
Settingranges:0~25Initialvalue:4.0
Cond
Cond
Cond
Cond
(6) RESET : FLT tune data reset
This resets the "FLT.Tun" setting back to the defaults.
198
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SwashDetailSwashDetail
The swash detail setting is used to keep the swash plate level at high and low collective pitch to cyclic interactions and cyclic
pitch to collective pitch interactions.
"
Swash Detail
"
screen from the
"
EXPERT MENU 3D
"
screen.
(1) PIT AIL: collective pitch aileron mixing rate
Going from MID to HIGH and MID to LOW collective pitch check that the
swash plate is traveling flat throughout the entire range.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:100%
(2) PIT ELE: collective pitch elevator mixing rate
Going from MID to HIGH and MID to LOW collective pitch check that the
swash plate is traveling flat throughout the entire range.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:100%
(3) PIT ELE2: collective pitch 2nd elevator mixing rate
This parameter adjusts the pitch to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rates can
both be adjusted individually for both full high and low collective positions.
Note: This setting is only available if the H4-xx swash mode has been
selected.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:100%
(4)
AIL PIT: aileron collective pitch mixing rate
At the middle collective pitch, check that during right to left and left to right
aileron action the swash plate is staying level on both the elevator and col-
lective pitch axis. If the swash plate is rising or falling with aileron inputs.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:100%
(5) AIL ELE: aileron elevator mixing rate
This parameter adjusts the aileron to elevator mixing rate. The rate can be
adjusted for left and right directions individually. Note: This setting is only
available if the H4-45 swash mode has been selected.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:100%
(6) AIL ELE2: aileron 2nd elevator mixing rate
This parameter adjusts the aileron to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rate
can be adjusted for left and right directions individually. Note: This setting
is only available if the H4-45 swash mode has been selected.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:100%
199
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SwashDetailSwashDetail
(7) ELE PIT: elevator collective pitch mixing rate
During back and forward elevator inputs at middle collective, check if the
swash plate is raising or lowering during the input.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: This setting can not be used when H4-00 swash mode is selected.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:H3-120=50%,exceptH3-120=100%
(8) ELE AIL: elevator aileron mixing rate
While moving the elevator back and forth at middle collective, check to
make sure the aileron axis is staying level.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: This setting can not be used when H4-00 swash mode is selected.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:H3-120=50%,exceptH3-120=100%
(9) ELE ELE2: elevator 2nd elevator mixing rate
This parameter adjusts the elevator to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rate
can be adjusted separately for up and down directions individually.
Note: This setting is only available if the H4-xx swash mode has been
selected.
Settingranges:30~150%Initialvalue:100%
(10) AIL High / AIL Low: Linkage compensation aileron
At HIGH pitch and LOW pitch check to make sure that the swash plate is
staying level on the elevator and collective axis when using aileron inputs.
If the swash plate is rising or falling:
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: check all four directions: high/right; high/left; low/right; low/left
Settingranges:0~100%Initialvalue:0%
(11) AIL Dir: Compensation direction of the aileron
If the above Data (+/-) correction from 0-100 is NOT in the correct compen-
sation direction, change the value from [+] or [-].
Setting:+/-Initialsetting:+
200
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
SwashDetailSwashDetail
(12) ELE High / ELE Low: Linkage compensation elevator
At both the HIGH pitch and LOW pitch check to make sure that the swash
plate is staying level on the aileron and collective axis when using elevator
inputs. If the swash plate is rising or falling:
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: check all four directions: high/back; high/forward; low/back; low/for-
ward.
Settingranges:0~100%Initialvalue:0%
(13) ELE Dir: Compensation direction of the elevator
If the above Data (+/-) correction from 0-100 is NOT in the correct compen-
sation direction, change the value from [+] or [-].
Setting:+/-Initialsetting:+
(14) Speed Comp: Speed compensation
In 120 degrees CCPM all servos do not travel the same distance on eleva-
tor input. Having previously set the ELE-PIT and ELE-AIL parameters, if
during rapid movement of the elevator axis the swash plate is not staying
level, use the "Speed Comp" button to match all servo speeds. Note: a (+
will slow the Aileron/Pitch Servo – will reduce speed comp on Aileron/Pitch
Servo).
Settingranges:0~100%Initialvalue:H3-120=50%,exceptH3-120=0%
(15) SWASH Rot: Swash rotation
Using the "SWASH Rot" button, electronically add rotor head phasing to
the swash plate controls. If possible, it is recommended to use mechanical
phasing adjustment, but if the rotor head does not allow this and you feel
that the model is NOT flying axially on each control input, this parameter
can be used to adjust the pure reaction of each axis in flight. (Typically ad-
vanced phasing on clockwise rotor disk and a slight clockwise increase in
swash plate alignment vs rotor axle are needed to create an axial reaction.
The opposite is true for a counterclockwise rotor disk model.)
Settingranges:-90

deg~+90

degInitialvalue:+0

deg
(16) RESET : Swash detail data reset
This resets the "Swash Detail" setting back to the defaults.
201
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
GovernorExpertGovernorExpert
This menu sets the Governor Expert parameters, allowing the user to further rene the governor settings.
"Governor Expert" screen from the "EXPERT MENU 3D" screen.
(1) Work Mode: Governor working mode
Sets the governing type mode.
- GOVERNOR (Governor Mode) – RPM is entirely controlled by the GOV
once it has engaged. The GOV will do whatever it takes to hold a constant
RPM throughout flight.
- Rev. Lmt (Limiter Mode) – Throttle control follows the throttle curves to
advance the throttle position during flight, but controls the RPM during
throttle reduction by not letting the RPM overspeed past the set RPM.
When the Rev.Lmt mode is selected, the menu (5) "THR. Mode" should be
set to Tx.Curve mode.
Setting:GOVERNOR/Rev.LmtInitialsetting:GOVERNOR
(2) Revo Disp: Governor working mode
This enables the user to display either the desired rotor RPM or the Engine
RPM accordingly.
Setting:Rotor/EngineInitialsetting:Rotor
(3) F/F. Cyclic: Feed Forward from Cyclic
Increasing the value will add throttle with cyclic commands to aid in RPM
stability.
Settingranges:0~100%Initialvalue:0%
(5) THR. Mode: Throttle data mode
This parameter selects the throttle input operation.
Optimize:
CGY sets the throttle input signal to optimum. There is no need to consider
the throttle curve setting on the transmitter.
Fixed:
This is the suggested mode for use with electric motors. This setting ensures
that there is a fixed throttle input as is related to the helicopter revolution.
Tx.Curve:
If this mode is selected, the CGY uses the exact throttle input from the transmit-
ter. As such, the throttle curve setting on the transmitter is required.
Note: when the Rev.Lmt mode is selected, this mode should also be selected.
Setting:GOVERNOR/Rev.LmtInitialsetting:GOVERNOR
(4) Yaw. Comp: Governor working mode
Yaw compensation allows the governor to more rapidly correct for changes
in power demands of the model resulting from yaw input. Set the mode to
match the gyro installation direction. Select from: CW/TOP, CW/BOTM,
CCW/TOP, CCW/BOTM.
Note: if the user has selected the governor only mode, this parameter is
inhibited.
Revolution fluctuation in the case of pirouettes
The governor detects the rpm via the revolution sensor mounted in the
engine section. During a pirouettes, the helicopter itself rotates, so that its
pirouettes speed is added (reduced) to the engine speed. Therefore, the
main rotor speed will fluctuate accordingly. Since the CGY has a gyro, it can
accurately measure the pirouette speed. The yaw rate correction is thus
determined by a combination of gyro function and governor function.
CW: clockwise rotor direction
CCW: counter clockwise rotor direction
TOP: Gyro top/name emblem facing up
BOTM: Gyro top/name emblem facing down
Setting:CW/TOP,CW/BOTM,CCW/TOP,CCW/BOTMInitialsetting:CW/TOP
202
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
GovernorExpertGovernorExpert
(6) Revo. Up Dly: Revolution change up delay
How quickly the RPM changes when increasing RPM between two different
RPM conditions and flight modes. A higher number slows the RPM change
rate; a lower value speeds up the RPM change rate.
Settingranges:2~40
FrmInitialvalue:8
Frm
(7) Revo. Dn Dly: Revolution change down delay
How quickly the RPM changes when reducing RPM between two different
RPM conditions and flight modes. A higher number slows the RPM change
rate; a lower value speeds up the RPM change rate.
Settingranges:2~40
FrmInitialvalue:10
Frm
(8) Start Dly: Start delay
How quickly the RPM stabilizes to the set RPM from when the GOV is
turned ON. A higher value slows down the spool up rate; a lower value
speeds up the spool up rate.
Settingranges:2~20
FrmInitialvalue:5
Frm
(9) Gov. On. Revo: Governor ON revolution setting
This parameter tells the governor at what percentage of the set rpm it is to
become active. The default value is 60%. In this case, the governor will not
engage until the engine rpm reaches 60% of the set rpm. If you feel that
the time for governor engagement is too slow, decrease the value to 50 ~
55%. The starting time will be faster.
Settingranges:50~90%Initialvalue:60%
(10) BFS. Volt: Battery F/S voltage setting
This parameter sets the battery fail safe and low battery alarm voltage
levels, or thresholds. Set the proper voltage as determined by the bat-
tery type. The battery characteristics are different depending on cell type/
chemistry.
Suggested setting voltages are as follows.
•4cellsNiCdorNiMH(Normal:4.8
v)=3.8
v
•2cellsLiFe(Normal:6.6
v)=6.0~6.2
v
•2cellsLiPo(Normal:7.4
v)=7.2~7.4
v
(11) Low. Revo: Low revolution setting
This value is set to assign the lowest possible governing RPM. If the RPM is
below, or can not reach this RPM, the governor will not engage. Select be-
tween either 1,000
rpm or 700
rpm. It corresponds also to a helicopter with a
rotor speed of 1,000
rpm or less, such as a large gas machine.
Setting:700/1,000
rpmInitialsetting:1000
rpm
(12) RESET : Governor expert data reset
This resets the "Governor Expert" setting back to the defaults.
203
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
The dedicated mixes, etc. usable when
multicopter model type is selected are displayed
in this Model menu functions section.
These dedicated mixes can be set for each
flight condition, as required. When you want to
use the system by switching the settings for each
condition by switch or stick position, use the
Condition select function to add ight conditions.
(Up to 8 conditions can be used)
MODEL MENU (Multicopter functions)
Model menu (Multicopter) functions table
Servomonitor
Displays the servo test and operation position
Conditionselect
Flight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.
AFR
Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.
Dualrate
D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.
Program.mixes
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for each condition.
Gyro
Used to switch gyro sensitivity
204
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Condition select
Flight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,
and condition delay can be set. [All model types]
The functions in the Model menu can be used by
switching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
by using the Condition select function to add ight
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition select
function, this setting is unnecessary. In this case,
use the ight conditions assigned at initial setting.
Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, this
function can be linked with other operations.
A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo
positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels during
condition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at the
switching destination condition, the
related function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
When multiple conditions were set, their
operation priority can be freely changed.
The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easily
conrmed.
Conditions List
Select [Condition select] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name
Condition Addition
1. When the [Add] button is tapped, the
Condition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to the
conditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the end
of this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.
Condition Renaming
1. Select the condition by
tapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the new
name is registered.
205
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Conditions List
Currently selected condition name
ConditionCopy
1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the button
of the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the data
is copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]
button.)
Condition Remove
1. Select the condition by
tapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button is
tapped, the condition is
reset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)
Prioritychange
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with the
priority [ ] or [ ] button. (The
last condition has the highest
priority.)
*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has the
lowest priority.
Last condition has
the highest priority
Conditiondelaysetting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
●Initial value: 0
●Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)
(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at the
back of this manual.)
The ON/OFF switch of
condition is chosen.
206
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
AFR
The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]
AFR function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
functions for each ight condition.
This is normally used after End Point has dened
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied from
one channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting the
operation rate through the AFR function.
Operation curve adjustment: Three types
of curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can be
selected. A maximum 17 points curve can be
used for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves from
complex curves to simple curves can be
used.
Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.
Select [AFR] at the model menu and call
the setup screen shown below.
Functionselection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.
When D/R is turned ON, the display will
show "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)
and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.
Operation curve setting
(For a description of the setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
Servo speed setting
(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)
Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)
(For more information, see the
description at the back of this manual.)
●Return to Model menu
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A and
Rate B
Curve select
Separately Combination
(Left and right
symmetrical
curve.)
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve
207
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Select [Dual rate] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
Dual rate
D/R curves which can be switched by switch, etc.
can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
Up to 6 rates can be added for each
condition.
D/R is set for each condition and is not
reected at other conditions.
D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.
The ON/OFF switch of
dual rate is chosen.
Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .
When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.
Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions and
switchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.
Rate,EXPsettings
areonAFRfunction
●Return to Model menu
208
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
● Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to call
the setup screen shown below.
Program. mixes
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]
Programmable mixing may be used to correct
undesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
be used for unusual control congurations. Mixing
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of the
mixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim added to
the Slave channel response, if you desire ("Trim"
setting). The mixing curve can be changed so
that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
eectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.
Oset-type mixing applies a xed oset or preset
to the programmed channel servo operation and
may control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful link
function, which allows Programmable mixing to be
linked with the special mixing functions, or with
other programmable mixing functions. The link
function can be set up for Master and Slave channel
individually.
Fine tuning trim
setting
The on time (start/stop
time) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of the
jet or scale plane, etc.
Group/single mode
switch (Gr./Sngl)
(For more information,
see the description
at the back of this
manual.)
Mixing/O󰮏set mode
switch
After this function is
activated, the master
and slave function
names (or o󰮏set mixing)
are displayed.
Operation curve setting
(For a description of the
setting method, see the
description at the back of
this manual.)
Activate the function by
tapping the [INH] .
Trim mode setting ON/OFF.
The ON/OFF switch of
prog. mixes is chosen.
Master function
(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.
Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting
●Return to Model menu
209
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting methods
●Group/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selected
conditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]
mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.
●Mixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to the
Offset mode.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Oset modes.
●Mixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]
button.
*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]
and [ON/OFF].
●Mixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switching
*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.
1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF by
switch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.
●Master channel setting (except offset type
mixing)
1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the
"Link" button.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and other
simple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button and
then select master channel side control.
●Slave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the
"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
●Trim mode ON/OFF setting
1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]
and [OFF].
*This is eective when the master channel is set by Function.
●Mixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of the
curve type you want to use to display the
selection screen. Then, select the curve you
want to use.
*For a description of the curve setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Fine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item to
call the <Switch> screen and then select the
lever, VR, etc. you want to use.
*For a description of the ne tuning trim setting method, see
the description at the back of this manual.
●Servo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen is
displayed.
*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In and
Speed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate at
starting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.
210
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Gyro
This function is used when a Futaba GY Series
gyro is used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/GY
mode) can be switched with a switch.
● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be
switched.
● Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3) can be
simultaneously controlled.
*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use the
Function menu of the Linkage menu to assign the sensitivity
channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) used to a vacant channel
beforehand.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than Function to [--].
● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be used.
Tap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
● When using this function, Tap [INH].
When a Futaba GY gyro is used, when [GY] type is selected, the
sensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
● When setting a switch, tap the Switch item and tap the "--" button to call
the selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)
Select [Gyro] at the model menu and
call the setup screen shown below.
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) and
sensitivity of the 3
axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.
3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment
Condition group/
single mode selection
(Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the three
rates (sensitivity) and switching between Normal
and AVCS is possible.
●Return to Model menu
211
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
This section describes the functions often used at the function setup screen. Refer to it when setting
each function.
Group/singlemodeswitching(Gr/Singl)
When setting multiple flight conditions,
linking the setting contents with all conditions
(group mode) or setting independently (single
mode) can be selected. The mode can be
changed at the [Gr] item on each setup screen.
[Group/single mode switching]
●Group mode (Gr)
The same setting contents are set to all
the ight conditions.
●Single mode (Singl)
Set this mode when the setting contents
are not linked with other conditions.
Conditiondelaysetting
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated when
there are sudden changes in the servo position
and variations in the operating time between
channels can be suppressed by using the
condition delay function of the condition select
function [Condition select].
When the delay function is set at the
switching destination condition, a delay
corresponding to that amount is applied and the
related functions change smoothly.
[Setting method]
1. Switch to the condition you want to set
and tap the delay[ 0 (value)].
2. Set the delay using the
"▼▼" "▼" "▲
"
"▲▲" buttons
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
(When the value is tapped, the delay is reset to the initial
value.)
Operations related to ight conditions
Operations value setting
Tapping the value setting buttons on each screen will cause value input
buttons to appear at the top of the panel.
Value input buttons display
at the top of the panel
Pressing and holding
a value will return it
to its default setting.
Small change
in value
Large change
in value
Large change
in value
Common operations used in function setup screen
Tap
Tap
Tap
212
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Operations related to ne tuning VR
[Fine tuning VR operation mode]
[LIN.] Mixing rate 0% at center of VR.
When the VR is turned clockwise and
counterclockwise, the mixing rate
increases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0% at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rate
increases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0% at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rate
increases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.
[Setting method]
1. Control selection
Tap the [Control] "--" button to call the
<Hardware select> screen, and then select
the switch and its ON direction.
2. Mode selection
Tap the [Mode] button, and then select the
mode ([LIN.], [ATL+], [ATL-], or [SYM.]).
3. Rate adjustment
Tap the [Rate] "value" button.
Set the rate using the
"▼ ▼" "▼" "▲
"
"▲▲" buttons
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initial
value.)
VR selection Rate adjustment
(Fine tuning VR operation position)
Operation mode selection
*The operation modes which can be
selected depend on the function.
LIN. SYM.ATL+ ATL-
After setting, press a HOME/EXIT button
213
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Operations related to servo speed
Servospeedsetting
The servo speed at each function
operation (including flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The servos
operate smoothly at a fixed speed
corresponding to the set speed. The
operating speed (In side) and return speed
(Out side) can be set individually.
Switch the operation mode according to
the set function.
"Symmetry" mode: Used with ailerons
and other self neutral functions.
"Linear" mode: Used with functions
which hold the operation position of
the throttle and switch channel, etc.
[Setting method]
1. Select the mode ([Linear] or
[Symmetry]). Each time the button is
tapped, it toggles between [Linear]
and [Symmetry].
2. Tap the In or Out Speed button and
set the servo speed.
Initial value: 0
Setting range: 0~27
(First)0 27(Slowly)(First)0 ~ 27(Slowly)
In speed
Out speed
In case of Symmetry
In case of Linear
Out speed
In speed
Symmetry
In
Speed
Out
Speed
In
Speed
Out
Speed
Linear
In
Speed
Out
Speed
214
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Curve setting operation
This section describes the setting procedure of curves which are used with the AFR function and each
mixing function.
Curve type selection
Four types of curves (EXP1, EXP2, Point and
Spline) can be selected.
Curvetypeselection
1. Tap the button of the curve type you
want to use.
*The curve type changes and the display
returns to the original screen.
[EXP1]: EXP1 curve
[EXP2]: EXP2 curve
[Point]: point curve
[Spline]: spline curve
215
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting by curve type
When the curve type is selected as described above, adjustment items corresponding to the curve type
appear on the screen. Adjust each curve as described below.
1. Tap to the [Offset] setting item.
2. Move the curve in the vertical direction
using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲" buttons
Initial value: +0.0%
(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initial
value.)
EXP1/EXP2curveadjustment
(EXP1 curve)
Using the EXP1 curve is eective in smoothing
starting of the ailerons, elevator, rudder, etc.
(EXP2 curve)
Using the EXP2 curve is eective in engine rise
and other engine control.
The curve left and right rates ([Rate A], [Rate
B]) and EXP curve rate ([EXP A], [EXP B]) can
be adjusted individually. ([EXP] for EXP2)
The curve can also be offset horizontally
([Oset]) in the vertical direction.
[Rate setting]
1. Tap to the [Rate A], [Rate B], [EXP A], or [EXP
B] setting item.
2. Set the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons
Initial value: +100.0% (rate)/+0.0% (EXP rate)
*Initial value diers depending on function.
Adjustment range: -200.0~+200.0% (rate)/-
100.0~+100.0% (EXP rate)
(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initial
value.)
[Offsetting the curve horizontally in the
vertical direction]
*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting
*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and right
symmetrical curve.
216
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pointadditionmethod
Pointdeletionmethod
Point curves or spline curves of up to 11/17 points
can be used. (Initial value: 7/9 points) The set
points can be freely increased, decreased, and
oset.
1.Open the screen of a mixing curve with the
curve function.
2. Tap the [Remove] button. (The selected
point becomes an outlined point □ )
3. Use the move between points button [← ]
or [→ ].
*The point is deleted.
2.Tap the "Position" button.
3. Tap the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲" button and
select the position (mark □) you want to
add.
1. Use the move between points button [← ]
or [→ ]
and select the point. (The red point is the
selected point.)
4. When the "Add" is tapped, the point is
added.
*A new point is created.
5. Press "Rate" and use the up/down arrows to
adjust the rate points up or down.
The red point
moves (to green point)
Move between
point
The kind of mixing curve
A red mark
moves freely
217
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
CurvesettingoperationSplinecurve
A smoother curve is made.
Setting method is same at spline and point.
Spline curve
The kind of mixing curve
Point Spline
Up to 11 or 17 points curve can be used.
(diers with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17 points
curve), 7 points (11 points curve)
*The set points can be freely increased, decreased, and
oset.
[Rate adjustment of each point]
2. Tap to the [Rate]
item. And set
the rate using
the "▼▼" "▼" "▲"
"▲▲" buttons
Repeat steps 1 through 2 and adjust the
curve.
Pointcurve(Point)adjustment
(Point)
*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting
*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and right
symmetrical curve.
1. Tap to the item
and select the point whose
rate you want to set.
*The mark on the curve shows
the currently selected point.
Up to 11 or 17 points curve can be
used. (diers with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17
points curve), 7 points (11 points
curve)
218
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Switch selection method
The various functions used in the T16IZ can be selected by switch. The switch (including when stick, trim
lever, or VR are used as a switch) setting method is common to all functions.
Switch selection
When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called.
(Switch selection screen example)
When switch is selected
Switch ON/OFF setting is possible at each position.
1. When the ON/OFF "Set" position switch is
tapped after the switch was selected, the
screen shown below appears.
*When the button of each position is tapped,
it toggles between ON and OFF.
2. Tap the button and set to the ON position.
3. Close the screen by tapping [Hardware
select].
When stick, trim lever, or VR is
selected.
When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as a switch,
the following 4 modes can be selected.
Next page
Tap the chosen
switch.
Normal or Alternate: Alternate switching
mode is available depending on mixing
function.
219
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hysteresis-type and box-type can be selected in a hardware select screen.
Linear・Hysteresis mode Symmetry・Hysteresis mode
Linear・Box mode
When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as a switch,
the following 4 modes can be selected.
This setting method selects function ON/OFF based
on the set point. Hysteresis (dead band) can be set
to ON and OFF. The ON and OFF positions can be
reversed with the Reverse button.
The operation is the same as the linear hysteresis
mode, but left and right (up and down) operations are
symmetrical about the neutral position. For example,
when you want to switch DR1 with the aileron stick,
when the stick is moved to the left or right, DR1 can
be turned ON at the same left and right position.
This mode turns on the switch within a range of 2 points.
Each point can be set. The ON and OFF positions can be
reversed with the Reverse switch.
Symmetry・Box mode
The operation is the same as the linear box mode,
but left and right (up and down) operation is
symmetrical about the neutral position.
220
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Area Green:ON
Area Red:OFF
Area Yellow:Hysteresis (Dead band)
[ Setting method ]
[ Setting method] Box Type
1. Move the stick, etc. to
the point you want to shift
and touch the [ON/OFF]
button. The boundary
points change.
1. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift upper side.
3. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift lower side.
Current stick position
Reverse of ON/
OFF direction
2. Touch the [Upper] button.
The boundary points
change.
4. Touch the [Lower] button.
The boundary points
change.
Symmetry
Symmetry
WhenshiftingtheON/OFFpoint
The ON/OFF and hysteresis (dead band) boundary point (there
are 2 points: top and bottom) position can be shifted. ON/OFF is
possible at a free position.
When Upper
(Lower) is set, at the
same time, Lower
(Upper) is also set.
When Upper (Lower) is
set, at the same time,
Lower (Upper) is also set.
Hysteresis
 :
Hysteresis(deadband)canbesettoONandOFF
[Setting method] Linear Type
1. Move the stick to the off
point you want to shift and
touch the [OFF] button. The
off points change.
2. Move the stick to the on
point you want to shift and
touch the [ON] button. The
on points change.
221
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Logicmode
AND: When both switches are ON, the
condition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are in
different states, the condition is ON.
Switchmodeselection
1. Tap to the [Mode] "Single" item.
(Logic switch setting screen)
Switchselection
1. Select the switch A and B.
Logicmodeselection
1. Tap to the [Logic] item.
2. Select the logic mode.
Logic switch (Condition select and DG1, DG2)
The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and o by combining two switches. For instance, the
condition is activated when 2 switches are turned on.
222
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
PC Port
The transmitter can be used as a game controller by connecting it to a computer with a USB cable. (Some
games cannot be used.)
Connection method (for Windows)
PC Port
Top
1. Connect the T16IZ PC port to your PC with
the USB cable included with the set.
2. When connecting for the first time, setup
will start. After the setup is complete, it can
be used as a game controller.
1. Connect T16IZ to your PC and start Real
Flight.
2. Select "Settings ..." from the "Simulation"
menu of RealFlight to open the "Settings"
dialog.
3. Set "Deadband Percentage (%)" of
"Controller" to 0.
4. Click the [OK] button to close the "Settings"
dialog.
5. Select "Select Controller ..." from the
"Simulation" menu to open the "Select
Controller" dialog.
6. Set "Prole" to "Futaba" and click the [Edit]
button.
*Channels 1 to 8 can be used with a USB connection.
* Operation conrmed simulator software
RealFlight 8 (Update to the latest version)
RealFlight 9
[ RealFlight setting method ]
223
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
7. If necessary, assign channels and make
reverse settings. After setting, click the
[Save As ...] button to save the prole.
8. Click the [Close] button to return to the
"Select Controller" dialog.
9. Click the [Calibrate] button to calibrate.
Set the stick, switch, dial, and lever to be
used in the neutral position, and press the
[Next] button.
10. Operate the stick, switch, dial, and
lever fully left and right or up and
down to enter the operating range.
After confirming that the correction is
complete, press the [Finish] button to
return to the "Select Controller" dialog.
11. Click the [OK] button in the "Select
Controller" dialog to close the dialog.
224
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
Updating
Your Futaba T16IZ transmitter programming can be updated easily online. When functions
are added or improved, the update file can be downloaded from our website. Copy the
update files to the microSD card and then use the following procedure to update the
program. Check our web site for the FAQ regarding updating for more information.
Updating procedure
Note: If the battery fully discharges during
program updating, updating will fail. When
the remaining battery capacity is 50% or
less, always recharge the battery before
updating.
Note: The model data in the transmitter can
be used unchanged after updating, but to
be safe, back up the model data before
updating.
1. Download the zip file of the update data
from our website.
2. Extract the zip le on your computer.
3. The "FUTABA" folder will be created on your
computer.
4. Copy the "FUTABA" folder into your microSD
card.
Note: If the microSD card has already had
"another FUTABA" folder before you make a
copy, the "FUTABA" folder is OVERWRITTEN.
5. Insert the microSD card with "FUTABA" folder
that contained the update software into the
SD card slot on your T16IZ radio transmitter.
6. Turn on the transmitter power while pressing
down the "HOME/EXIT" button. The update
screen appears on the LCD display of your
T16IZ and the software update is started.
Futaba WEB
16IZ Update Zip file
Download
Copy the "FUTABA"
folder into your SD card.
Installed microSD card
of the update le
Press the HOME/EXIT switch and turn on
Updating
1
2
225
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
7. When the software update is completed,
"Completed" message is shown on the LCD
display of your T16IZ. (Show below picture.)
8. Turn off the power switch of your T16IZ and
remove the microSD card from the card slot.
Possible Problems
When one of the error messages shown
below appears on the LCD screen your
T16IZ, the software update will not be
completed.
"Low battery."
Software update is postponed because
of low battery. Retry the software update
after the battery is recharged.
"Update le not found."
The T16IZ cannot find the update file on
the microSD card. Check to be sure all the
update files have been copied onto the
microSD card.
"Broken le."
The T16IZ detects the update le error. The
update file may be broken or for another
transmitter.
"Write error."
The software update procedure is stopped
for an unknown reason. Contact your local
service center when this error message
appears on the LCD screen of your T16IZ.
Don't absolutely remove the battery
and the microSD card from the
transmitter during the update.
There is a possibility that the transmitter
will be damaged.
Recovering a failed update
If you failed to update for any reason, it
may transmitter will not start.
In that case, please update again
transmitter in the following procedure.
1. Detach the battery from the transmitter.
2. Insert the microSD card that contained
the update les to the transmitter.
3. Attach the battery to the transmitter
while pressing down the "HOME/EXIT"
button.
4. The update will start.
Even after the above steps, if the
transmitter fails to update or does not
start, please have it serviced.
Complete
226
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
T14SG/FX-22/T12K → T16IZ MODEL DATA CONVERSION
The model data (only latest version) of T14SG/FX-22/T12K can be copied to T16IZ.
* microSD card is required.
* The model data of T16IZ cannot be copied to T14SG/FX-22/T12K.
* Use an SD card conversion adapter (not included) to insert a microSD card into the T14SG/FX-22/T12K.
[Model data conversion method]
1. Attach a microSD card that contains model
data of T14SG/FX-22/T12K to the SD slot of a
T16IZ.
2. Turn on the power switch, and the Data
Converter should run.
3. The converter shows a list of model data in
the card. Select a model data that you want
to convert and push "CONVERT"
"Yes" key,
and the converter should begin converting
data.
4. If the convert succeeds, the converter will
show the following message. The converted
data are copied to the internal memory of
the T16IZ. Hence, if the T16IZ does not have
available space in its internal memory,
converts must fail.
* When microSD card cannot be recognized, it may be able
to be used if it reformats by SD formatter oered from SD
Association.
SD formatter is downloadable from SD Association
https://www.sdcard.org/
CAUTION
After finishing data copy, be sure to
perform a complete check of operation
with the model to be used.
Check well all the directions of operation
and all the operation switches.
5. The converter can accept model data
made by T14SG/FX-22/T12K with the latest
software only. If you try to convert model
data made by old version software, the
converter must fail to convert and show
the following error message. If this message
is shown, do the following procedure to
update the model data in order to avoid
this limitation.
(a) First, update a T14SG/FX-22/T12K to the latest software.
(b) Load the model data which failed to convert into the
T14SG/FX-22/T12K with the latest software, and the
model data should be updated to the latest format.
(c) Save the updated model data to a microSD card.
(d) Retry to convert the updated model data on a T16IZ.
227
GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS
This product uses the following open source software.
■ Google Noto Fonts
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/
OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic
and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. The OFL allows
the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works,
can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and
derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document
created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source les, build
scripts and documentation. "Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s). "Original Version" refers to the
collection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s). "Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or
substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, and
sell modied and unmodied copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy contains the above
copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable
metadata elds within text or binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding Copyright
Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modied Version, except
to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed under any other
license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT
SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
FUTABA CORPORATION
Hobby Radio Control Business Center Sales & Marketing Department
1080 Yabutsuka, Chosei-mura, Chosei-gun, Chiba-ken, 299-4395, Japan
TEL: +81-475-32-6051, FAX: +81-475-32-2915
©FUTABA CORPORATION 2020, 11 (1)
213

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Futaba T-16IZ bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Futaba T-16IZ in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 35,73 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info